You are on page 1of 452

Forester 2011

Owner Manual
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

*
C Copyright 2010 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
This manual describes the following vehicle types.*

* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.


1

Warranties & Models with HID headlights How to use this Owners
Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. CAUTION
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owners Manual
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the lights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove read this manual. To protect yourself and
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle,
warranties: HID headlights before vehicle dis-
posal. Once removed, please reuse, follow the instructions in this manual.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- Failure to observe these instructions may
. Emission Control Systems Warranty lights as hazardous waste. result in serious injury and damage to your
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle.

All warranty information, including details This manual is composed of fourteen


of coverage and exclusions, is in the
& Models without HID head- chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. lights table of contents, so you can usually tell at
Please read these warranties carefully. NOTE a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
This vehicle does not contain mercury
& Warranties for Canada devices or parts. Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by airbags
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by This chapter informs you how to use the
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
come with the following warranties: tions for the SRS airbags.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Emission Control Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
All warranty information, including details This chapter informs you about the opera-
of coverage and exclusions, is in the tion of instrument panel indicators and
Warranty and Service Booklet. Please how to use the instruments and other
read these warranties carefully. switches.

CONTINUED
2

Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION


This chapter informs you how to operate This chapter informs you about dimen-
the climate control. sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in
Chapter 5: Audio Chapter 13: Consumer information and which injury or damage to your
This chapter informs you how to operate Reporting safety defects vehicle, or both, could result if the
your audio system. This chapter informs you about Uniform caution is ignored.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment tire quality grading standards and Report-
This chapter informs you how to operate ing safety defects. NOTE
interior equipment. Chapter 14: Index
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
Chapter 7: Starting and operating This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in tions how to make better use of your
This chapter informs you how to start and this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle.
operate your SUBARU. something you want to read.
Chapter 8: Driving tips & Safety symbol
This chapter informs you how to drive your
& Safety warnings
SUBARU in various conditions and ex- You will find a number of WARNINGs,
plains some safety tips on driving. CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency These safety warnings alert you to poten-
This chapter informs you what to do if you tial hazards that could result in injury to
have a problem while driving, such as a you or others.
flat tire or engine overheating. Please read these safety warnings as well
Chapter 10: Appearance care as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand-
This chapter informs you how to keep your
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
SUBARU looking good.
safely.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need WARNING
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you A WARNING indicates a situation in You will find a circle with a slash through it
how to keep your SUBARU running which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means Do
properly. result if the warning is ignored. not, Do not do this, or Do not let this
happen, depending upon the context.
3

& Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols


You will find several abbreviations in this
LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for There are some of the symbols you may
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia- children
tions are shown in the following list. see on your vehicle.
LED Light emitting diode For warning and indicator lights, refer to
Abbreviation Meaning LSD Limited slip differential Warning and indicator lights F21.
A/C Air conditioner MIL Malfunction indicator lamp
Mark Name
A/ELR Automatic/Emergency locking Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
retractor MMT ganese tricarbonyl WARNING
ABS Anti-lock brake system MT Manual transmission
AKI Anti knock index OBD On-board diagnostics
CAUTION
ALR Automatic locking retractor RON Research octane number
AT Automatic transmission Supplemental restraint sys-
SRS tem Power door lock
ATF Automatic transmission fluid
TIN Tire identification number
AWD All-wheel drive
Tire pressure monitoring sys- Power door unlock
DRL Daytime running light TPMS tem
EBD Electronic brake force distri- VDC Vehicle dynamics control Power window with automatic
bution open (all models) and close (if
equipped) function
ELR Emergency locking retractor
FWD Front-wheel drive Passengers windows lock
and unlock
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating Fuel
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
Front fog lights
HID High intensity discharge
INT Intermittent
Hazard warning flasher

CONTINUED
4

Mark Name Mark Name Mark Name


Tail lights, license plate light
Engine hood and instrument panel illumi- Air recirculation
nation

Seat heater Headlights Engine oil

Child restraint top tether an- Washer


chorages Turn signal

Child restraint lower an- Door lock (Transmitter)


chorages Illumination brightness

Horn Fan speed Door unlock (Transmitter)

Wiper intermittent Instrument panel outlets Rear gate (Transmitter)

Windshield washer Instrument panel outlets and


foot outlets

Windshield wiper mist (for


single wipe) Foot outlets

Rear window wiper Windshield defroster and foot


outlets

Rear window washer Windshield defroster

Lights Rear window defogger/Out-


side mirror defogger
5

Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety
driving considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is
WARNING moving. The passenger cannot
needs enough space for deploy-
. All persons in the vehicle should ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will
the vehicle starts to move. Other- seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen-
wise, the possibility of serious wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi-
injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control cle.
event of a sudden stop or acci- and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in-
dent. move the seat as far back as fants and small children should
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR
. To obtain maximum protection in
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the system which is appropriate for
For instructions and precautions, carefully the childs age, height and
vehicle should always wear seat- read the following sections.
belts when the vehicle is moving. weight. If a child is too big for a
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint . For the seatbelt system, refer to Seat- child restraint system, the child
System) airbag does not do away belts F1-12. should sit in the REAR seat and
with the need to fasten seatbelts. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts.
In combination with the seat- *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics,
belts, it offers the best combined System airbag) F1-33. children are safer when properly
protection in case of a serious restrained in the rear seating
accident. positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
Not wearing a seatbelt increases to stand up or kneel on the seat.
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the . Put children aged 12 and under in
vehicle has the SRS airbag. the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt.
CONTINUED
6

The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children gine exhaust system to prevent
considerable speed and force in the vehicle. They could acci- engine exhaust gas from enter-
and can injure or even kill chil- dentally injure themselves or ing the vehicle.
dren, especially if they are 12 others through inadvertent op- . Never run the engine in a closed
years of age and under and are eration of the vehicle. Also, on space, such as a garage, except
not restrained or improperly re- hot or sunny days, temperature for the brief time needed to drive
strained. Because children are in a closed vehicle could quickly the vehicle in or out of it.
lighter and weaker than adults, become high enough to cause
their risk of being injured from severe or possibly fatal injuries . Avoid remaining in a parked
deployment is greater. to them. vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD unavoidable, then use the venti-
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections. lation fan to force fresh air into
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS the vehicle.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO . For the seatbelt system, refer to Seat-
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE belts F1-12. . Always keep the front ventilator
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO . For the child restraint system, refer to inlet grille free from snow, leaves
THE SRS AIRBAG. Child restraint systems F1-22. or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
. Always turn the child safety locks . For the SRS airbag system, refer to ways works properly.
to the LOCK position when *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
children sit on the rear seat. System airbag) F1-33. . If at any time you suspect that
Serious injury could result if a exhaust fumes are entering the
child accidentally opens the door & Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
and falls out. Refer to Child monoxide) as possible. If you must drive
safety locks F2-20.
under these conditions, drive
. Always lock the passengers win- WARNING only with all windows fully open.
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the rear gate closed while
Failure to follow this procedure Engine exhaust gas contains driving to prevent exhaust gas
could result in injury to a child carbon monoxide, a colorless from entering the vehicle.
operating the power window. Re- and odorless gas which is dan-
fer to Windows F2-20. gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
7

& Drinking and driving & Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING WARNING WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very There are some drugs (over the When you are tired or sleepy, your
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- counter and prescription) that can reaction time will be delayed and
stream delays your reaction time delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at-
and impairs your perception, judg- your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness will be impaired. If you
ment and attentiveness. If you drive tentiveness. If you drive after taking drive when tired or sleepy, your,
after drinking even if you drink just them, it may increase your, your your passengers and other per-
a little it will increase the risk of passengers and other persons risk sons chances of being involved in
being involved in a serious or fatal of being involved in a serious or a serious accident may increase.
accident, injuring or killing yourself, fatal accident.
your passengers and others. In Please do not continue to drive but
addition, if you are injured in the If you are taking any drugs, check with instead find a safe place to rest if you
accident, alcohol may increase the your doctor or pharmacist or read the are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
severity of that injury. literature that accompanies the medication should make periodic rest stops to refresh
Please dont drink and drive. to determine if the drug you are taking can yourself before continuing on your journey.
impair your driving ability. Do not drive When possible, you should share the
Drunken driving is one of the most after taking any medications that can driving with others.
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
hol affects all people differently, you may ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
have consumed too much alcohol to drive you have a medical condition that requires
safely even if the level of alcohol in your you to take drugs, please consult with
blood is below the legal limit. The safest your doctor.
thing you can do is never drink and drive. Never drive if you are under the influence
However if you have no choice but to of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- own health and well-being, we urge you
tely before getting behind the wheel. not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.

CONTINUED
8

& Modification of your vehicle & Driving with pets & Tire pressures
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your Check and, if necessary, adjust the
CAUTION driving and distract your attention from pressure of each tire (including the spare)
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, at least once a month and before any long
Your vehicle should not be modified unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown journey.
other than with genuine SUBARU around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
parts and accessories. Other types your passengers. Besides, the pets can Check the tire pressure when the tires are
of modifications could affect its be hurt under these situations. It is also for cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
performance, safety or durability, their own safety that pets should be tire pressures to the values shown on the
and may even violate governmental properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- tire placard. For detailed information, refer
regulations. In addition, damage or strain a pet with a special traveling to Tires and wheels F11-30.
performance problems resulting harness which can be secured to the rear
from modification may not be cov- seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
WARNING
ered under warranties. which can be secured to the rear seat by Driving at high speeds with exces-
routing a seatbelt through the carriers sively low tire pressures can cause
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers the tires to deform severely and to
& Car phone/cell phone and in the front passengers seat. For further rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
driving information, consult your veterinarian, crease in temperature could cause
local animal protection society or pet tread separation, and destruction of
WARNING shop. the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
accident.
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and park in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
9

& California proposition 65 & On-pavement and off-road General information


warning driving
This vehicle is classified as a utility & Noise from under the vehicle
WARNING vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly NOTE
higher rollover rate than other types of You may hear a noise from under the
Engine exhaust, some of its consti- vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground
tuents, and certain vehicle compo- vehicle approximately 5 hours after the
clearance and higher center of gravity, engine is turned off. However, this does
nents contain or emit chemicals making it more likely to roll over than
known to the State of California to not indicate a malfunction. This noise
ordinary passenger cars. It also handles is caused by the operation of the fuel
cause cancer and birth defects or and maneuvers differently from other
other reproductive harm. In addi- evaporation leakage checking system
passenger cars. For this reason, please and the operation is normal. The noise
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and read carefully the following section and
certain components of product wear will stop after approximately 15 min-
follow the instructions and precautions in utes.
contain or emit chemicals known to order to prevent serious injury or death
the State of California to cause due to loss of control, rollover and other
cancer and birth defects or other accidents. Refer to On-pavement and off-
reproductive harm. road driving F8-6.

& California Perchlorate Advi-


sory
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1


Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Headlight switch (page 3-30)
3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-47)
& Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-34)
5) Moonroof (page 2-25)
6) Roof rail (page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-4)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-33)
9) Flat tires (page 9-6)
10) Tire chains (page 8-11)
11) Front fog light switch (page 3-32)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
13) Towing hook (page 9-14)
13
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-45)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-20)
4) Tie-down hook (page 9-14)
5) Rear gate (page 2-23)
6) Towing hook (page 9-14)

CONTINUED
14

& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint


system (page 1-29)
! Passenger compartment area 2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)
3) Parking brake lever (page 7-29)
4) Front seat (page 1-2)
5) Rear seat (page 1-7)
15
1) Center console (page 6-5)
2) Cup holder (page 6-8)
3) Front power supply socket (page 6-9)
4) Glove box (page 6-5)

CONTINUED
16

& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-4)


2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-44)
3) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-32)
4) Light control lever (page 3-29)
5) Combination meter (page 3-6)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-33)
7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5)
8) Audio (page 5-1)
9) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-13)/
Select lever (AT) (page 7-15)
10) Climate control (page 4-1)
11) Cruise control (page 7-32)
12) Horn (page 3-47)
13) SRS airbag (page 1-33)
14) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-47)
15) Hands-free switches (page 5-43)
16) Audio control buttons (page 5-38)
17) Fuse box (page 11-45)
18) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-27)
19) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)
20) Power windows (page 2-20)
17

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-34)
2) Mist (page 3-35)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-35)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-36)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-35)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-33)
7) Light control switch (page 3-29)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-32)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-30)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-30)
11) Turn signal (page 3-31)

CONTINUED
18

& Combination meter 1) Tachometer (page 3-10)


2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
! Type A 3) Select lever and gear position indicator
(page 3-24)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Information display switching knob (page
3-26)
6) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
9) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
19

! Type B (U.S.-spec. models) 1) Tachometer (page 3-10)


2) Speedometer (page 3-8)
3) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-8)
6) Select lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-24)
7) Coolant temperature low indicator light/
Coolant temperature high warning light
(page 3-16)

CONTINUED
20

! Type B (except U.S.-spec. models) 1) Tachometer (page 3-10)


2) Speedometer (page 3-8)
3) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-8)
6) Select lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-24)
7) Coolant temperature low indicator light/
Coolant temperature high warning light
(page 3-16)
21

& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page

Mark Name Page / ABS warning light 3-19 Front fog light indicator 3-25
light (if equipped)
Seatbelt warning light 3-13
/ Brake system warning 3-20 Security indicator light 3-23
light
Front passengers seat- 3-13
belt warning light
Door open warning light 3-21 Headlight indicator light 3-25
SRS airbag system 3-15
warning light AWD warning light Cruise control indicator
(AT models) 3-21 light 3-25

/ Front passengers fron- 3-15


tal airbag ON indicator Hill start assist warning Cruise control set indi-
light (MT models) 3-21 cator light 3-25

/ Front passengers fron- 3-15


tal airbag OFF indicator Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehicle Low fuel warning light 3-21
Dynamics Control op- 3-22
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunction 3-16 eration indicator light
Low tire pressure warn-
indicator lamp ing light 3-18
Vehicle Dynamics Con- 3-23 (U.S.-spec. models)
Coolant temperature low trol OFF indicator light
indicator light (if
equipped)/Coolant tem- 3-16 SPORT mode indicator 3-24
perature high warning Turn signal indicator 3-25 light (AT models)
light (if equipped) lights

Charge warning light 3-17 High beam indicator light 3-25

Oil pressure warning Automatic headlight


light 3-17 beam leveler warning
light (models with HID 3-22
headlights)
AT OIL TEMP warning 3-18
light (AT models)
22

Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some
of these functions can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-15
Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-17
of doors)
Impact sensor operation (only models Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
with shock sensors [dealer option])
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-18
Dome light/map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-15
Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
tem
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-10

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7


Remote engine start system Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-11
(dealer option)
Defogger and deicer system Rear window defogger, outside mirror Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-45
for models with the automatic defogger and windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation
climate control system
Map light/Dome light Operation of map light/dome light OFF OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-2/
delay timer 6-3
Battery drainage prevention Battery drainage prevention function* Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-5
function
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 3-13
23
*: The setting can only be changed at a SUBARU dealer.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

System servicing ............................................... 1-21


1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-3 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-21
Power seat (drivers seat if equipped) ............... 1-4 Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-22
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-23
Active head restraint ........................................... 1-6 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-24
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-24
Armrest .............................................................. 1-8 Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-27
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-29
Reclining the seatback (if equipped) ................... 1-10
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-31
Folding down the rear seatback .......................... 1-10
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-12 System airbag)................................................ 1-33
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-12
Models with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-13 restraints for driver, front passenger, and
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor window-side rear passengers........................... 1-33
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-13 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-37
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-13 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-47
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-13 SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-57
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-19 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-58
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-20 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-59
System monitors ................................................ 1-21
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats If the front seatbacks are not


used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
WARNING the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
. Never adjust the seat while driv- increase, and both can result in
ing to avoid the possibility of serious internal injury or death.
loss of vehicle control and of
. The SRS airbags deploy with
personal injury.
considerable speed and force.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Occupants who are out of proper
sure the hands and feet of rear position when the SRS airbag
seat passengers and cargo are deploys could suffer very serious
clear of the adjusting mechan- injuries. Because the SRS airbag
ism. needs enough space for deploy-
. After adjusting the seat, push it ment, the driver should always WARNING
slightly to make sure it is se- sit upright and well back in the Put children aged 12 and under in
curely locked. If the seat is not seat as far from the steering the rear seat properly restrained at
securely locked, it may move or wheel as practical while still all times. The SRS airbag deploys
the seatbelt may not operate maintaining full vehicle control with considerable speed and force
properly. and the front passenger should and can injure or even kill children,
. Do not put objects under the front move the seat as far back as especially if they are 12 years of age
seats. They may interfere with possible and sit upright and well and under and are not restrained or
front seat locking and cause an back in the seat. improperly restrained. Because chil-
unexpected accident. dren are lighter and weaker than
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- adults, their risk of being injured
straint when the occupant sits from deployment is greater. For that
well back and upright in the seat. reason, we strongly recommend
To reduce the risk of sliding that ALL children (including those
under the seatbelt in a collision, in child seats and those that have
the front seatbacks should be outgrown child restraint devices) sit
always used in the upright posi- in the REAR seat properly re-
tion while the vehicle is running. strained at all times in a child
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

restraint device or in a seatbelt, & Manual seat ! Reclining the seatback


whichever is appropriate for the
childs age, height and weight. Se- ! Forward and backward adjustment
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
restrained in the rear seating posi- seatback to the desired position. Then
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to release the lever and make sure the
tions than in the front seating posi-
the desired position. Then release the seatback is securely locked into place.
tions. For instructions and precau-
lever and move the seat back and forth to
tions concerning child restraint sys- The seatback placed in a reclined position
make sure that it is securely locked into
tems, refer to Child restraint sys- can spring back upward with force when
place.
tems F1-22. the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.

CONTINUED
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Seat cushion height adjustment & Power seat (drivers seat if


(drivers seat) equipped)

WARNING
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
To prevent the passenger from slid- is lowered.
ing under the seatbelt in the event of 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
a collision, always put the seatback rises.
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not The height of the seat can be adjusted by
place objects such as cushions moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
between the passenger and the up and down.
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust Both the drivers seat and the front
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion WARNING passengers seat are equipped with head
height. restraints.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch To prevent the passenger from slid-
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up ing under the seatbelt in the event of The head restraint should be adjusted so
or push down the front end of the control a collision, always put the seatback that the center of the head restraint is
switch. in the upright position while the closest to the top of the occupants ears.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
switch
To raise:
place objects such as cushions
To adjust the angle of the seatback, Pull the head restraint up.
between the passenger and the
move the control switch.
seatback. If you do so, the risk of To lower:
4) Seat height control switch Push the head restraint down while
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen pressing the release button on the top of
down the rear end of the control switch.
will increase, and both can result in the seatback.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lumbar support, push the serious internal injury or death. To remove:
front side of the switch. To decrease While pressing the release button, pull out
lumbar support, push the rear side of the the head restraint.
switch. & Head restraint adjustment To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.

WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
1) Head restraint you must reinstall all head re-
2) Release button straints to protect vehicle occu-

CONTINUED
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

pants. the center of the head restraint is closest Seat heater (if equipped)
. All occupants, including the dri- to the top of the occupants ears.
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicles seat until the
CAUTION CAUTION
head restraints are placed in their . Each active head restraint is . There is a possibility that people
proper positions in order to mini- effective only when its height is with delicate skin may suffer
mize the risk of neck injury in the properly adjusted and driver/pas- slight burns even at low tempera-
event of a crash. senger sits in the correct posi- tures if they use the seat heater
tion on the seat. for a long period of time. When
. If your vehicle is involved in a using the heater, always be sure
& Active head restraint rear-end collision, have an to warn the persons concerned.
authorized SUBARU dealer in- . Do not put anything on the seat
spect the active head restraints. which insulates against heat,
. The active head restraints may such as a blanket, cushion, or
not operate in the event the similar items. This may cause the
vehicle experiences only a slight seat heater to overheat.
impact in the rear.
. The active head restraints may be NOTE
damaged if they are pushed hard
Use of the seat heater for a long period
from behind or subjected to
of time while the engine is not running
shock. As a result, they may not
can cause battery discharge.
function if the vehicle suffers a
rear impact.
The front seats of your vehicle are
equipped with active head restraints. They
automatically tilt forward slightly in the
event the vehicle is struck from the rear,
decreasing the amount of rearward head
movement and thus reducing the risk of
whiplash. For maximum effectiveness, the
head restraint should be adjusted so that
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7

position. Rear seats


To turn on the seat heater, press the LO
or HI position on the switch, as desired,
depending on the temperature.
Selecting the HI position will cause the
seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
opposite side of the current position.
The indicator next to the switch illuminates
when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicles interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.

WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
1) HI Rapid heating abdomen will increase, and both can
2) LO Normal heating result in serious internal injury or
3) OFF Off death.
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is either in the Acc or ON
CONTINUED
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Armrest & Head restraint adjustment


Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.

WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
WARNING you must reinstall all head re-
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
of the armrest. straints to protect vehicle occu-
Never stack luggage or other cargo pants.
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and WARNING . All occupants, including the dri-
injure passengers in the event of a ver, should not operate a vehicle
To avoid the possibility of serious or sit in a vehicles seat until the
sudden stop or accident. injury, passengers must never be head restraints are placed in their
allowed to sit on the center armrest proper positions in order to mini-
while the vehicle is in motion. mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9

! Rear windows side seating position position depending on your sitting


height.

1) Head restraint
1) Head restraint 2) Release button
2) Release button To raise:
A) When not used (retracted position)
To remove: B) When used (click position) Pull the head restraint up.
While pressing the release button, pull out To lower:
the head restraint. Push the head restraint down while
To install: pressing the release button on the top of
Install the head restraint into the holes that the seatback.
are located on the top of the seatback until To remove:
the head restraint locks. While pressing the release button, pull out
! Rear center seating position the head restraint.
To install:
CAUTION Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
The head restraint is not intended to the head restraint locks.
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the When the rear-center seating position is
head restraint to an appropriate occupied, raise the head restraint to an

CONTINUED
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

appropriate position depending on your sliding under the lap belt and of the
sitting height. When the rear center seat- lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
ing position is not occupied, lower the will increase, and both can result in
head restraint to improve rearward visibi- serious internal injury or death.
lity.

& Reclining the seatback (if CAUTION


equipped)
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the
cargo area cover when you re- Push the switch and adjust the seatback
cline the rear seat. to the desired position.
. Move the front cover of the cargo Then release the switch and make sure
area cover backward so that the the seatback is securely locked into place.
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to Car- & Folding down the rear seat-
go area cover (dealer option) back
F6-13.
WARNING
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
To prevent the passenger from slid- back, confirm that there are no
ing under the seatbelt in the event of passengers or objects on the
a collision, always put the seatback rear seat. Not doing so creates
in the upright position while the a risk of injury or property da-
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not mage if the seatback suddenly
place objects such as cushions folds down.
between the passenger and the
. For models equipped with the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
rear seat center table, when fold-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11

ing down the rear seatback, re- to place all of the seatbelts and
turn the rear seat center table to the tab attached to the seat
its original position. If the rear cushion above the seat cushion.
seat center table is not returned And make certain that the
to its original position, the rear shoulder belts are fully visible.
seat center table could break and
bodily injury could occur.
. Never allow passengers to ride CAUTION
on the folded rear seatback or in For models with the reclining func-
the cargo area. Doing so may tion, the rear seatback may auto-
result in serious injury or death. matically and forcefully fold down
. Secure all objects and especially because of its internal spring. Place
long items properly to prevent your hand on the seatback to lower One-touch seatback folding lever (if
them from being thrown around it more gradually. equipped)
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden 1. Lower the head restraints.
stop, a sudden steering maneu- 2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
ver or a rapid acceleration. release knob or the one-touch seatback
folding lever, and then fold the seatback
. When you return the seatback to
down.
the original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that To return the seatback to its original
it is securely fixed in place. If the position, raise the seatback until it locks
seatback is not securely fixed in into place and make sure that it is securely
place, the seatback may sud- locked.
denly fold down because of sud-
den braking or objects may move
out from the cargo area, which
could cause serious injury or
death. Release knob

. After returning the rear seatback


to its original position, be certain
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seatbelts the rear seat properly restrained According to accident statistics,


at all times. The SRS airbag children are safer when properly
& Seatbelt safety tips deploys with considerable speed restrained in the rear seating
and force and can injure or even positions than in the front seat-
WARNING kill children, especially if they are ing positions. For instructions
12 years of age and under and and precautions concerning the
. All persons in the vehicle should are not restrained or improperly child restraint system, refer to
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE restrained. Because children are Child restraint systems F1-22.
the vehicle starts to move. Other- lighter and weaker than adults,
wise, the possibility of serious their risk of being injured from Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
injury becomes greater in the deployment is greater. For that sensing and diagnostic module, which will
event of a sudden stop or acci- reason, we strongly recommend record the use of the seatbelt by the front
dent. that ALL children (including passenger when any of the SRS frontal
. All belts should fit snugly in order those in child seats and those and side airbags deploy.
to provide full restraint. Loose that have outgrown child re-
! Infants or small children
fitting belts are not as effective in straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all Use a child restraint system that is
preventing or reducing injury. suitable for your vehicle. Refer to Child
times in a child restraint device
. Each seatbelt is designed to or in a seatbelt, whichever is restraint systems F1-22.
support only one person. Never appropriate for the childs height ! Children
use a single belt for two or more and weight.
persons even children. Other- If a child is too big for a child restraint
wise, in an accident, serious Secure ALL types of child re- system, the child should sit in the rear seat
injury or death could result. straint devices (including for- and be restrained using the seatbelts.
ward facing child seats) in the According to accident statistics, children
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies REAR seats at all times. are safer when properly restrained in the
including retractors and attach-
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD rear seating positions than in the front
ing hardware worn by occupants
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE seating positions. Never allow a child to
of a vehicle that has been in a
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS stand up or kneel on the seat.
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
if damage is not obvious. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO anchor height (window-side seating posi-
. Put children aged 12 and under in THE SRS AIRBAG.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13

tions only) and then if necessary move the & Emergency Locking Retrac- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
child closer to the belt buckle to help tor (ELR)
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must When the child restraint system is re-
be taken to securely place the lap belt as The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency moved, make sure that the seatbelt
low as possible on the hips and not on the Locking Retractor (ELR). retracts fully and the retractor returned to
childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the The emergency locking retractor allows the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child normal body movement but the retractor mode.
restraint system should be used. Never locks automatically during a sudden stop, For instructions on how to convert the
place the shoulder belt under the childs impact or if you pull the belt very quickly retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
arm or behind the childs back. out of the retractor. the ELR mode, refer to Installing child
restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt
! Expectant mothers & Automatic/Emergency Lock- F1-24.
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passengers seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ and chime
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Refer to Seatbelt warning light and
Retractor normally functions as an Emer- chime F3-13.
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an additional locking mode & Fastening the seatbelt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode intended to secure a child restraint WARNING
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even . Never use a belt that is twisted or
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in reversed. In an accident, this can
that position and the seatbelt cannot be increase the risk or severity of
Expectant mothers also need to use the
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks injury.
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
will be heard which indicate the retractor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt . Keep the lap belt as low as
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
should be worn securely and as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
possible over the hips, not over the waist. sion, this spreads the force of the
When securing a child restraint system on lap belt over stronger hip bones
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, instead of across the weaker
the seatbelt must be changed over to the abdomen.
CONTINUED
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

. Seatbelts provide maximum re- ! Front seatbelts


straint when the occupant sits 1. Adjust the seat position according to
well back and upright in the seat. the following procedure.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision, Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the
the front seatbacks should be upright position. Move the seat as far from
always used in the upright posi- the steering wheel as practical while still
tion while the vehicle is running. maintaining full vehicle control.
If the front seatbacks are not Front passengers seat: Adjust the seat-
used in the upright position in a back to the upright position. Move the seat
collision, the risk of sliding under as far back as possible.
the lap belt and of the lap belt 2. Sit well back in the seat.
sliding up over the abdomen will 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
increase, and both can result in belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
serious internal injury or death. WARNING the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
. Do not put cushions or any other return the belt slightly and pull it out more
Never place the shoulder belt under slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
materials between occupants the arm or behind the back. If an
and seatbacks or seat cushions. let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
accident occurs, this can increase strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
If you do so, the risk of sliding the risk or severity of injury.
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result CAUTION
in serious internal injury or
death. Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING


belt anchor height
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt


4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor Push the button on the buckle.
down.
Before closing the door, make sure that
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on catching the belt webbing in the door.
it is locked in place.
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
CONTINUED
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center Push the button on the buckle.
seatbelt)
Before closing the door, make sure that
1. Sit well back in the seat. the belts are retracted properly to avoid
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the catching the belt webbing in the door.
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If ! Rear center seatbelt
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on


the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt


1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle


until you hear a click.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17

The rear center seatbelt is stowed in a


WARNING WARNING recessed compartment located in the
ceiling above the cargo area.
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
bing twisted can increase the risk or to the respective buckles. If the 1. Remove the tongue plate from the slot
severity of injury in an accident. seatbelt is used only as a shoulder in the recessed compartment and pull out
When fastening the belt after it is belt (with the connectors tongue the seatbelt slowly.
pulled out from the retractor, espe- plate not fastened to the connec-
cially when inserting the connec- tors buckle on the right-hand side),
tors tongue plate into the mating it cannot properly restrain the wear-
buckle (on right-hand side), always er in position in an accident, possi-
check that the webbing is not bly resulting in serious injury or
twisted. death.

CONTINUED
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

2. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
through the belt guide. on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate


into the center seatbelt buckle marked
3. After confirming that the webbing is not CENTER on the left-hand side until it
twisted, insert the connector (tongue) clicks.
attached at the webbing end into the Push the release button of the center
buckle on the right-hand side until a click seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
is heard. unfasten the seatbelt.
If the belt stops before reaching the NOTE
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it When the seatback is folded down for
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be greater cargo area, it is necessary to
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after disconnect the connector.
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on


the shoulder belt.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19

You should hold the webbing end and . Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
guide it back into the retractor while it is so that the tongue plates are
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in neatly stored. A hanging tongue
the recessed compartment and then insert plate can swing and hit against
the connector (tongue) plate into the slot. the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.

& Seatbelt maintenance


To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
object into the slot in the connector including the webbing and all hardware
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
disconnect from the buckle. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly. . Keep the belts free of polishes,
Otherwise, the metal tongue oils, chemicals and particularly
plates may hit against the trim, battery acid.
resulting in damaged trim. . Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.


1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seatbelt pretensioners seat occupant. . If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, a malfunction or activation of the
an operating noise will be heard and a pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
small amount of smoke will be released. dealer as soon as possible.
These occurrences are normal and not . If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a bly or surrounding area has been
fire in the vehicle. damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been as soon as possible.
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not you to explain to the buyer that it has
be pulled out and retracted and therefore seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
must be replaced. buyer to the contents of this section.

NOTE WARNING
The drivers and front passengers seat- . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The signed to activate in minor frontal or . To obtain maximum protection,
seatbelt pretensioners for the drivers seat side impacts or in rear impacts. the occupants should sit in an
and front passengers seat operate at the . The drivers seat and passengers upright position with their seat-
same time as the frontal, and side SRS seat pretensioners and frontal, side or belts properly fastened. Refer to
airbags. If the vehicle rolls over, they curtain SRS airbags operate simulta- Seatbelts F1-12.
operate simultaneously with the curtain neously. . Do not modify, remove or strike
airbag. . Pretensioners are designed to func- the front seatbelt retractor as-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the semblies or surrounding area.
The front and side airbag sensors and the event that a pretensioner is activated, This could result in accidental
rollover sensor are used as the preten- both the drivers and front passengers activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioner sensors. If a sensor detects a seatbelt retractor assemblies must be sioners or could make the sys-
certain predetermined amount of force replaced only by an authorized tem inoperative, possibly result-
during a frontal collision, a side impact SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
collision or a rollover collision, the front belt retractor assemblies, use only pretensioners have no user-ser-
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the genuine SUBARU parts. viceable parts. For required ser-
retractor to take up the slack so that the
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
belt more effectively restrains the front
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21

equipped with seatbelt preten- . Tampering with or disconnecting that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
s i o n e r s , s e e y o u r n ea r e s t the systems wiring could result operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
SUBARU dealer. in accidental activation of the as soon as possible.
. When discarding front seatbelt seatbelt pretensioner and/or
retractor assemblies or scrap- SRS airbag or could make the & Precautions against vehicle
system inoperative, which may
ping the entire vehicle due to
result in serious injury. Do not
modification
collision damage or for other
use electrical test equipment on Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
reasons, consult your SUBARU
any circuit related to the seatbelt you want to install any accessory parts to
dealer.
pretensioner and SRS airbag your vehicle.
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, con- CAUTION
& System monitors
sult your nearest SUBARU deal- Do not perform any of the following
A diagnostic system continually monitors
er. modifications. Such modifications
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The can interfere with proper operation
seatbelt pretensioners share the control CAUTION of the seatbelt pretensioners.
module with the SRS airbag system. . Attachment of any equipment
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a The front sub sensors are located (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag on both the right and left sides at the skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
system warning light will illuminate. For front of the vehicle, and the SRS ine SUBARU accessory parts to
details, refer to SRS airbag system airbag control module including the the front end.
monitors F1-57. impact sensors is located under the . Modification of the suspension
center console. If you need service system or front end structure.
& System servicing or repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt retractors, have the . Installation of a tire of different
work performed by your authorized size and construction from the
WARNING
SUBARU dealer. tires specified on the vehicle
. When discarding a seatbelt re- placard attached to the drivers
tractor assembly or scrapping door pillar or specified for indivi-
the entire vehicle damaged by a NOTE dual vehicle models in this Own-
collision, consult your SUBARU If the front part of the vehicle is ers Manual.
dealer. damaged in an accident to the extent
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Child restraint systems properly secured in the vehicle. When child from injury in a collision,
installing the child restraint system, care- because the child will be caught
fully follow the manufacturers instructions. between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the Additionally, holding a child in your
rear seating positions than in the front lap or arms in the front seat exposes
seating positions. that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces considerable speed and force, the
require that infants and small children be child could be injured or even killed.
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.

Infants and small children should always


be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
priate for the childs age and size. All child
restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or WARNING
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in Installation of WARNING Children should be properly re-
child restraint systems by use of lower and strained at all times. Never allow a
tether anchorages (LATCH) F1-29). Never let a passenger hold a child child to stand up, or to kneel on any
Children could be endangered in an on his or her lap or in his or her seat. Unrestrained children will be
accident if their child restraints are not arms while the vehicle is moving. thrown forward during sudden stop
The passenger cannot protect the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23

or in an accident and can be injured A: Front passengers seat only a child restraint system that has a
seriously. You should not install a child restraint bottom base that fits snugly against the
Additionally, children standing up or system (including a booster seat) due to contours of the seat cushion and can be
kneeling on or in front of the front the hazard to children posed by the securely retained using the seatbelt.
seat are exposed another serious passengers airbag. If it is unavoidable to install a child
danger. Since the SRS airbag de- restraint system in the rear seats center
B: Rear seat, window-side seating seating position, lower the center head
ploys with considerable speed and positions
force, the child could be injured or restraint to the lowest position and install
Recommended positions for all types of the child restraint system by correctly
even killed.
child restraint systems. passing the rear center seatbelt through
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency the belt guide.
& Where to place a child re- Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
straint system lower anchorages (bars) are provided for WARNING
installing a child restraint system.
The following are SUBARUs recommen- Some types of child restraints might not be Put children aged 12 and under in
dations on where to place a child restraint able to be secured firmly due to projection the rear seat properly restrained at
system in your vehicle. of the seat cushion. all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
In this seating position, you should use
and can injure or even kill children,
only a child restraint system that has a
especially if they are 12 years of age
bottom base that fits snugly against the
and under and are not restrained or
contours of the seat cushion and can be
improperly restrained. Because chil-
securely retained using the seatbelt.
dren are lighter and weaker than
C: Rear seat, center seating position adults, their risk of being injured
Installing a child restraint system is not from deployment is greater.
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- For that reason, be sure to secure
belt and an upper anchorage (tether ALL types of child restraint devices
anchorage) are provided in this position. (including forward facing child
Some types of child restraints might not be seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
able to be secured firmly due to projection You should choose a restraint de-
of the seat cushion. vice which is appropriate for the
In this seating position, you should use childs age, height and weight. Ac-

CONTINUED
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

cording to accident statistics, chil- & Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys-
dren are safer when properly re- system tems with A/ELR seatbelt
strained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi- WARNING
tions.
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
appropriate for the childs age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
(weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
WARNING injuries or death to the child.
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS cle Safety Standards for the United States
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGERS or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A dards for Canada. It can be identified by CAUTION
R E A R W A R D FA C I N G C H I L D looking for the label on the child restraint
When you install a child restraint
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- system or the manufacturers statement of
system, follow the manufacturers
SENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS compliance in the document attached to
instructions supplied with it. After
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO the system.
installing the child restraint system,
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE Also it is important for you to make sure check to ensure that it is held
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO that the child restraint system is compa- securely in position. If it is not held
THE SRS AIRBAG. tible with the vehicle in which it will be tight and secure, the danger of your
used.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25

child suffering personal injury in the


event of an accident may be in-
creased.

! Installing a rearward facing child


restraint

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the system forward and from side to side to
retractor to change the retractor over from check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) child restraint can be more firmly secured
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) by pushing it down into the seat cushion
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind and then tightening the seatbelt.
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
1. Place the child restraint system in the
clicks will be heard which indicate the to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
rear seating position.
retractor functions as ALR. properly functioning).
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.

CONTINUED
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint

8. To remove the child restraint system, 4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
press the release button on the seatbelt 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
buckle and allow the belt to retract retractor to change the retractor over from
completely. The belt will return to the the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
ELR mode. to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
WARNING into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- retractor functions as ALR.
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT 1. Place the child restraint system in the
PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO rear seating position.
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE or around the child restraint system
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE following the instructions provided by its
SRS AIRBAG. manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27

9. To remove the child restraint system,


press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.

NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
6. Before having a child sit in the child 8. If the child restraint system requires a & Installing a booster seat
restraint system, move it back and forth top tether, latch the hook onto the top
and right and left to check if it is firmly tether anchorage and tighten the top WARNING
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can tether. For additional instructions, refer to
be more firmly secured by pushing it down Top tether anchorages F1-31. . Child restraint systems and seat-
into the seat cushion and then tightening belts can become hot in a vehicle
the seatbelt. that has been closed up in sunny
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt weather; they could burn a small
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR child. Check the child restraint
properly functioning). system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
CONTINUED
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

injuries or death to the child. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through increase the risk or severity of
or around the booster seat and the child injury to the child.
following the instructions provided by its . Never place the shoulder belt
CAUTION manufacturer. under the childs arm or behind
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle the childs back. If an accident
When you install a child restraint until you hear a click. Take care not to
system, follow the manufacturers occurs, this can increase the risk
twist the seatbelt. or severity of injury to the child.
instructions supplied with it. After
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned . The seatbelt should fit snugly in
installing the child restraint system,
across the center of childs shoulder and order to provide full restraint.
check to ensure that it is held
that the lap belt is positioned as low as Loose fitting belts are not as
securely in position. If it is not held
possible on the childs hips. effective in preventing or redu-
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the cing injury.
event of an accident may be in- . Place the lap belt as low as
creased. possible on the childs hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
childs shoulder. Placing the
4. To remove the booster seat, press the shoulder belt over the neck may
release button on the seatbelt buckle and result in neck injury during sud-
allow the belt to retract. den braking or in a collision.

1. Place the booster seat in the rear WARNING


seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster . Never use a belt that is twisted or
seat. reversed. In an accident, this can
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29

& Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
Some types of child restraint systems can
. Child restraint systems and seat- be installed on the rear seat of your
belts can become hot in a vehicle vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
that has been closed up in sunny child restraint systems are secured to the
weather; they could burn a small designated anchorages provided on the
child. Check the child restraint vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
system before you place a child chorages are sometimes referred to as the
in it. LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren). Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle. anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
Unsecured child restraint sys- chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
tems can be thrown around in- modating such child restraint systems.
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturers
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
securely in position. If it is not held installing a child restraint system only on

CONTINUED
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the rear seat window-side seating posi- the seat cushion meets the seatback.
tions. For each window-side seating posi-
tion, two lower anchorages are provided. 1. Use the marks to locate the two
lower anchorages (bars) for the position
Each lower anchorage is located where where you want to install the child restraint
the seat cushion meets the seatback. system.

1) Cover
You will find marks on the cover at the
bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These
marks indicate the positions of the lower
anchorages (bars).
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided at the locations 2. While following the instructions sup-
shown in the above illustration. plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

Each lower anchorage is located where


Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31

& Top tether anchorages


Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
3. [If your child restraint system is of a 5. Before seating a child in the child vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
flexible attachment type (which uses restraint system, try to move it back and tether whenever one is required or avail-
tether belts to connect the child restraint forth and right and left to verify that it is able.
system properly to the lower anchorages)] held securely in position.
While pushing the child restraint into the 6. To remove the child restraint system,
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tether belts up to secure the child restraint tion.
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt. If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
4. Connect the top tether hook to the
SUBARU dealer.
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to Top tether anchorages
F1-31.

CONTINUED
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Anchorage location position.


! To hook the top tether

2. For both window-side seating posi-


tions, remove the cover for the appropriate
upper anchorage.
1. Remove the headrest at the window-
side seating position where the child
restraint system has been installed with
the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift up
the headrest while pressing the release
button. Store the headrest in the cargo
area. Avoid placing the headrest in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn.
1) For right seat
2) For center seat
3) For left seat
3. Attach the child restraint top tether
There is an anchorage located on the rear hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
edge of the ceiling above each seating 4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if *SRS airbag (Supplemental gers)


you have any question regarding the
installation of a child restraint system.
Restraint System airbag) These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec-
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re- tion provided by the seatbelt.
CAUTION straint system. This name is used be-
The system also controls front seatbelt
Always remove the headrest when cause the airbag system supplements the
pretensioners. For operation instructions
mounting a child restraint system vehicles seatbelts.
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
with a top tether. Otherwise, the top Your vehicle is equipped with a crash pretensioner, refer to Front seatbelt pre-
tether cannot be fastened tightly. sensing and diagnostic module, which will tensioners F1-20.
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, WARNING
side and curtain airbags deploys.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
& Models with SRS airbags and driver and all passengers in the
lap/shoulder restraints for vehicle should always wear seat-
driver, front passenger, and belts when the vehicle is moving.
window-side rear passengers The SRS airbag is designed only
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- as a supplement to the primary
mental restraint system in addition to a protection provided by the seat-
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating belt. It does not do away with the
position and each rear window-side seat- need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
ing positions. The supplemental restraint bination with the seatbelts, it
system (SRS) consists of six airbags. offers the best combined protec-
The configurations are as follows. tion in case of a serious accident.
. Drivers and front passengers frontal Not wearing a seatbelt increases
airbags the chance of severe injury or
. Drivers and front passengers side death in a crash even when the
airbags vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas- For instructions and precautions
senger, and window-side rear passen- concerning the seatbelt system,

CONTINUED
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

refer to Seatbelts F1-12. ment, the driver should always


sit upright and well back in the
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because seat as far from the steering . Put children aged 12 and under in
the SRS airbag deploys with wheel as practical while still the rear seat properly restrained
considerable speed faster than maintaining full vehicle control at all times. The SRS airbag
the blink of an eye and force to and the front passenger should deploys with considerable speed
protect in high speed collisions, move the seat as far back as and force and can injure or even
the force of an airbag can injure possible and sit upright and well kill children, especially if they are
an occupant whose body is too back in the seat. 12 years of age and under and
close to SRS airbag. . Do not place any objects over or are not restrained or improperly
It is also important to wear your near the SRS airbag cover or restrained. Because children are
seatbelt to help avoid injuries between you and the SRS airbag. lighter and weaker than adults,
that can result when the SRS If the SRS airbag deploys, those their risk of being injured from
airbag contacts an occupant not objects could interfere with its deployment is greater.
in proper position such as one proper operation and could be For that reason, we strongly
thrown forward during pre-acci- propelled inside the vehicle and recommend that ALL children
dent braking. cause injury. (including those in child seats
Even when properly positioned, and those that have outgrown
there remains a possibility that child restraint devices) sit in the
an occupant may suffer minor REAR seat properly restrained at
injury such as abrasions and all times in a child restraint
bruises to the face or arms device or in a seatbelt, whichever
because of the SRS airbag de- is appropriate for the childs age,
ployment force. height and weight.
. The SRS airbags deploy with Secure ALL types of child re-
considerable speed and force. straint devices (including for-
Occupants who are out of proper ward facing child seats) in the
position when the SRS airbag REAR seats at all times.
deploys could suffer very serious According to accident statistics,
injuries. Because the SRS airbag children are safer when properly
needs enough space for deploy- restrained in the rear seating
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35

positions than in the front seat- get fresh air promptly.


ing positions. . A deploying SRS airbag releases
For instructions and precautions hot gas. Occupants could get
concerning the child restraint burned if they come into direct
system, refer to Child restraint contact with the hot gas.
systems F1-22.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD NOTE
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS When you sell your vehicle, we urge
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO you to explain to the buyer that it is
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO the buyer to the applicable section in
THE SRS AIRBAG. this Owners Manual.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passen-
gers seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with consid-
erable force and can injure or
even kill the child.

CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
CONTINUED
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Components 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-


hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passengers
side)
18) Front passengers seatbelt tension sen-
sor
19) Front passengers occupant detection
system weight sensor
20) Front passengers occupant detection
control module
21) Front passengers frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)

1) Airbag control module (including impact 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
and rollover sensors) 6) Side airbag module (drivers side)
2) Frontal airbag module (drivers side) 7) Side airbag module (front passengers
3) Frontal airbag module (front passengers side)
side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) side)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37

& SUBARU advanced frontal system. BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD


airbag system The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU in the center portion of the steering wheel.
advanced frontal airbag system that com- The front passengers SRS frontal airbag
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard
requirements in the amended Federal under an SRS AIRBAG mark.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
No. 208. the drivers and front passengers SRS
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
system automatically determines the de- seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
ployment force of the drivers SRS frontal drivers and front passengers head and
airbag at the time of deployment as well as chest.
whether or not to activate the front
passengers SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment. WARNING
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
drivers and front passengers sun visors Never allow a child to stand up, or to
beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH kneel on the front passengers seat.
ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag The SRS airbag deploys with con-
attached to the glove box lid beginning siderable force and can injure or
with the phrase Even with Advanced Air even kill the child.
Bags. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU WARNING
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
seated in an appropriate child restraint INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
CONTINUED
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that


can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.

WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard.
steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its
and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro-
move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause
possible and sit upright and well injury.
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
NOTE . Do not apply any strong impact to the
The drivers SRS side airbag, SRS front passengers seat such as by kicking.
curtain airbag and seatbelt preten- . Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
sioner are not controlled by the gers seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- immediately.
tem. . Do not remove or disassemble the front
passengers seat.
! Front passengers SRS frontal air-
bag . Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator sengers seat.
operates in different ways depending on . Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
the severity of impact. la, etc.) under the front passengers seat.
The total load on the seat is monitored by . The front passengers seat must not be
WARNING the occupant detection systems weight used with the head restraint removed.
sensor located under the seat.
Do not attach accessories to the . Do not leave any article including a
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- The system has another sensor that child restraint system on the front passen-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the monitors the tension of the front passen- gers seat or the seatbelt tongue and
SRS airbag deploys, those objects ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and buckle engaged when you leave your
could become projectiles that could seatbelt tension data from the sensors, vehicle.
seriously injure vehicle occupants. the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passengers SRS frontal . Do not place a magnet near the
airbag should or should not be inflated. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
! Drivers SRS frontal airbag The occupant detection system may not . Do not use front seats with their back-
The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a inflate the front passengers SRS frontal ward-forward position and seatback not
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal being locked into place securely. If any of
different ways depending on the severity airbag deploys. This is normal. them are not locked securely, adjust them
of impact. again. For the adjustment procedure of
Observe the following precautions. Failure the manual seats, refer to Manual seat
Have the system inspected by your to do so may prevent the SUBARU F1-3.
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS advanced frontal airbag system from
airbag system warning light illuminates. functioning correctly or cause the system If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
to fail. passengers occupant detection system
CONTINUED
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

have failed, the SRS airbag system is restrained with it. (See WARNING that child restraint system be also
warning light will illuminate. Have the follows.) seated in the REAR seat. This is
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- . The seat is equipped with a forward because children sitting in the front
er immediately if the SRS airbag system facing child restraint system and a small passengers seat may be killed or
warning light illuminates. child is restrained with it. (See WARNING severely injured should the front
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this that follows.) passengers SRS frontal airbag de-
may affect the proper function of the . The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. seat and a small child is in the booster place for children.
Have your vehicle inspected at your seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
SUBARU dealer. . The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passengers seat is occu-
load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following
NOTE mined monitoring time period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase
The front passengers SRS side airbag, the load on the front passengers seat,
. The seat is occupied by a child who
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre- activating the front passengers SRS
has outgrown a child restraint system or
tensioner are not controlled by the frontal airbag even though that seat is
by a small adult. (See WARNING that
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- occupied by a child.
follows.)
tem. . Do not place any article on the seat
. The front passengers occupant detec-
other than the child occupant and a child
! Passengers frontal airbag ON and tion system is malfunctioning.
restraint system.
OFF indicators
WARNING . Do not place more than one child on
Refer to Front passengers frontal airbag the seat.
ON and OFF indicators F3-15. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a
! Conditions in which front passen- CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback.
gers SRS frontal airbag is not PASSENGERS SEAT EVEN IF THE . Do not store a heavy load in the
activated FRONT PASSENGERS SRS FRON- seatback pocket.
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
will not be activated when any of the sure to install it in the REAR seat in place his/her hands or legs on the front
following conditions are met regarding the a correct manner. Also, it is strongly passengers seatback, or allow him/her to
front passengers seat: recommended that any forward fa- pull the seatback.
cing child seat or booster seat be
. The seat is empty.
installed in the REAR seat, and that
. The seat is equipped with a rearward even children who have outgrown a
facing child restraint system and an infant
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41

! If the front passengers frontal air- sition and seatback of front passengers above have been taken, seat the child/
bag ON indicator illuminates and the seat are locked into place securely by small adult in the rear seat and im-
OFF indicator turns off even when moving the seat back and forth. mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
an infant or a small child is in a child for an inspection. Even if the system
restraint system (including booster If the ON indicator still remains illuminated has passed the dealer inspection, it is
seat) while the OFF indicator turns off after recommended that on subsequent trips
taking relevant corrective actions de- the child/small adult always take the
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK scribed above, relocate the child restraint
position if the front passengers frontal rear seat.
system to the rear seat and immediately
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the contact your SUBARU dealer for an Children who have outgrown a child
OFF indicator turns off even when an inspection. restraint system should always wear the
infant or a small child is in a child restraint seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
system (including booster seat). Remove NOTE is deactivated or activated.
the child restraint system from the seat. By When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen-
referring to the child restraint manufac- restraint system or a small adult is gers SRS frontal airbag is activated
turers recommendations as well as the seated in the front passengers seat,
child restraint system installation proce- The front passengers SRS frontal airbag
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon
dures in Child restraint systems F1-22, system may or may not activate the
correctly install the child restraint system. impact when any of the following condi-
front passengers SRS frontal airbag tions are met regarding the front passen-
Turn the ignition switch to the ON depending on the occupants seating
position and make sure that the front gers seat.
posture. If the front passengers SRS
passengers frontal airbag ON indicator . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. indicator remains illuminated while . When a heavy article is placed on the
the OFF indicator turns off), take the seat.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions. When the front passengers seat is occu-
following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following
. Ensure that no article is placed on the the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
seat other than the child restraint system . Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passengers seat,
and the child occupant. the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passengers SRS
. Ensure that there is no article left in the frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
seatback pocket. is occupied by an adult.
nates while the OFF indicator turns off
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- despite the fact that the actions noted . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

CONTINUED
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

lift the front passengers seat cushion books, shoes, or other objects trapped the following SUBARU distributors.
using his/her feet. under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or
on the side of the seat. <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
. Do not place any article under the front of Columbia>
passengers seat, or squeeze any article . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
from behind and under the seat. This may sition and seatback of front passengers Subaru of America, Inc.
lift the seat cushion. seat are locked into place securely by Customer Dealer Services Department
. Do not squeeze any article between moving the seat back and forth. P.O. Box 6000
the front passengers seat and side trim/ . Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
pillar, door or center console box. This ON position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
may lift the seat cushion. the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica- <Hawaii>
! If the passengers frontal airbag OFF tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
indicator illuminates and the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
indicator turns off even when the indicator remains off. HI 96819
front passengers seat is occupied 808-839-2273
by an adult If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off, <Guam>
This can be caused by the adult incor- ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shens Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
rectly sitting in the front passengers seat. and immediately contact your SUBARU bile
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK dealer for an inspection.
position. Ask the front passenger to set 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
the seatback to the upright position, sit up ! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
straight in the center of the seat cushion, for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
Trebol Motors
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition Changing or moving any parts of the front
switch to the ON position. If the OFF seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
indicator remains illuminated while the ON front side frame, radiator panel, instrument 00910
indicator remains off, take the following panel, combination meter, steering wheel, 787-793-2828
actions. steering column, tire, suspension or floor There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK panel can affect the operation of the tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
position. SUBARU advanced airbag system. If in such an area, please contact the
. Ensure that there are no articles, you have any questions, you may contact SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43

you bought your vehicle. ! Operation

A) Drivers side
B) Passengers side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not
obstructed.

CONTINUED
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

The SRS airbag can function only when ment, the SRS airbag immediately starts components can be very hot as a
the ignition switch is in the ON position. to deflate so that the drivers vision is not result of deployment.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag obstructed. The time required from detect-
system is designed to determine the ing impact to the deflation of the SRS The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front
activation or deactivation condition of the airbag after deployment is shorter than the passengers SRS frontal airbag are de-
front passengers SRS frontal airbag blink of an eye. signed to deploy in the event of an
depending on the total load on the front accident involving a moderate to severe
Both when only the drivers SRS frontal
passengers seat monitored by the front frontal collision. It is basically not designed
airbag deploys and the drivers and front
passengers occupant detection system to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy,
weight sensor. For this reason, only the cause the necessary protection can be
the drivers and front passengers seatbelt
drivers SRS frontal airbag may deploy in achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
pretensioners operate at the same time.
the event of a collision, but this does not are basically not designed to deploy in
mean failure of the system. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
airbag would activate in a non-accident dents because deployment of only the
If the front sub sensors and the impact situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers
sensors in the airbag control module will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and front passengers SRS frontal airbags
detect a predetermined amount of force and will not interfere with the drivers would not help the occupant in those
during a frontal collision, the control ability to maintain control of the vehicle. situations. The drivers and front passen-
module sends signals to the airbag gers SRS frontal airbags are designed to
module(s) (only drivers module or both When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, function on a one-time-only basis.
drivers and front passengers modules) fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
instructing the module(s) to inflate the some smoke will be released. These SRS airbag deployment depends on the
SRS frontal airbag(s). The drivers and occurrences are a normal result of the level of force experienced in the passen-
front passengers SRS frontal airbags use deployment. This smoke does not indicate ger compartment during a collision. That
dual stage inflators. a fire in the vehicle. level differs from one type of collision to
The two inflators of each airbag are another, and it may have no bearing on
triggered either sequentially or simulta- CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
neously, depending on the severity of itself.
impact, in the case of the drivers SRS Do not touch the SRS airbag system
frontal airbag and depending on the components around the steering
severity of impact and the total load on wheel and dashboard with bare
the seat in the case of the front passen- hands right after deployment. Doing
gers SRS frontal airbag. After deploy- so can cause burns because the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45

! Example of accident in which the ! Examples of the types of accidents Only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or
drivers/drivers and front passen- in which it is possible that the both drivers and front passengers SRS
gers SRS frontal airbag(s) will most drivers/drivers and front passen- frontal airbags may be activated when the
likely deploy. gers SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
ploy. undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).

A head-on collision against a thick con-


crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both
drivers and front passengers SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.

CONTINUED
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the drivers/drivers 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of drivers/drivers and front passengers
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
vers/drivers and front passengers SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47

! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the & SRS side airbag and SRS
in which the drivers/drivers and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its curtain airbag
front passengers SRS frontal side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision. The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an SRS AIRBAG label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupants chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
1) First impact the rear seat). An SRS AIRBAG mark is
2) Second impact located at the top of each center pillar.
In an accident where the vehicle is In a moderate to severe side impact
impacted more than once, the drivers collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
and/or front passengers SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first between the occupant and the side
impact. window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupants
Example: In the case of a double collision, head.
first with another vehicle, then against a In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
concrete wall in immediate succession, sides of the vehicle deploy between the
once either or both of the drivers and front occupant and the side window and sup-
passengers SRS frontal airbags is/are plement the seatbelt by reducing the
The drivers and front passengers SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not impact to the occupants head.
frontal airbags are designed basically not be activated on the second impact.

CONTINUED
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING door, and it provides protection


by deploying rapidly (faster than
The SRS side airbag and SRS the blink of an eye) in the event of
curtain airbag are designed as only a side impact collision. However,
a supplement to the primary protec- the force of SRS side airbag
tion provided by the seatbelt. They deployment may cause injuries
do not do away with the need to if your head or other parts of the
fasten seatbelts. It is also important body are too close to the SRS
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid side airbag.
injuries that can result when an . Since your vehicle is equipped
occupant is not seated in a proper with SRS curtain airbags, do not
upright position. sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms and hands out of the win- WARNING
dow. The SRS curtain airbag on Do not rest your arm on either front
each side of the cabin is stored in door or its internal trim. It could be
the roof side (between the front injured in the event of SRS side
pillar and a point over the rear airbag deployment.
seat), and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact or a rollover. How-
ever, the force of its deployment
may cause injuries if your head is
too close to it.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49

WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passengers seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also WARNING
equipped with a front passen-
gers SRS frontal airbag, children . Do not attach accessories to the
aged 12 and under should be door trim or near either SRS side
placed in the rear seat anyway airbags and do not place objects
and should be properly re- near the SRS side airbags. In the
strained at all times. event of the SRS side airbag
. Never allow a child to kneel on deployment, they could be pro-
any passengers seat facing the pelled dangerously toward the
side window or put their head, vehicles occupants and cause
arms and hands out of the win- injuries.
dow. In the event of an accident, . Do not attach a hands-free micro-
the force of the SRS curtain phone or any other accessory to
airbag deployment could injure a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
the child seriously because his/ pillar, the windshield, a side win-
her head is close to the SRS dow, an assist grip, or any other
curtain airbag. cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

CONTINUED
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

A hands-free microphone or deploy independently of each other since


other accessory in such a loca-
WARNING each has its own impact sensor. There-
tion could be propelled through Do not put any kind of cover or fore, they may not both deploy in the same
the cabin with great force by the clothes or other objects over either accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
curtain airbag, or it could prevent front seatback and do not attach SRS curtain airbag deploys independently
correct deployment of the curtain labels or stickers to the front seat of the drivers and front passengers SRS
airbag. In either case, the result surface on or near the SRS side frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
could be serious injuries. airbag. They could prevent proper instrument panel.
. Never hang or place coat hangers deployment of the SRS side airbag, An impact sensor, which senses impact
or other hard or pointed objects reducing protection available to the force, is located in each of the left and
near the side windows. If such front seats occupant. right center pillars and rear wheel houses.
items are present when the SRS Another impact sensor, which also senses
curtain airbags deploy, they ! Operation impact force, is located under the rear
could be thrown through the center seat. In addition, a rollover sensor
passenger compartment and is located inside the airbag control mod-
cause serious injuries. They ule. If one of the center pillar impact
could also prevent proper opera- sensors and the impact sensor that is
tion of the SRS curtain airbags. located under the rear center seat to-
gether sense an impact force above a
predetermined level in a side collision, the
control module causes both the SRS side
airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted
side to inflate regardless of whether the
rear wheel house impact sensor on the
same side senses an impact. If one of the
rear wheel house impact sensors and the
impact sensor that is located under the
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
rear center seat together sense a suffi-
airbag can function only when the ignition
ciently strong impact force, the control
switch is in the ON position.
module causes only the SRS curtain
The drivers and front passengers SRS airbag on the impacted side to inflate. If
side airbags and SRS curtain airbags the rollover sensor detects rollover of the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51

vehicle, the control module inflates the After deployment, do not touch any and inclination at the time of the rollover.
curtain airbags. After the deployment, the part of the SRS curtain airbag
SRS side airbag immediately starts to ! Example of the type of accident in
system (from the front pillar to the
deflate. The time required from detection which the SRS side airbag will most
part of the roof side over the rear
of an impact to deflation of an SRS side likely deploy.
seat). Doing so can cause burns
airbag after deployment is shorter than the because the components can be
blink of an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS curtain airbags remain inflated
for a while following deployment then The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
slowly deflates. airbags are designed to deploy in the
event of an accident involving a moderate
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain to severe side impact collision. Also, in the
airbags deploy even when no one occu- case of a rollover, the SRS curtain airbags
pies the seat on the side on which an deploy. They are basically not designed to
impact is applied. deploy in a lesser side impact. Also, they
When the SRS side airbag and SRS are basically not designed to deploy in
curtain airbags deploy, a sudden, fairly frontal or rear impacts because SRS side
loud inflation noise will be heard and some airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
smoke will be released. These occur- ment would not help the occupant in those A severe side impact near the front seat
rences are a normal result of the deploy- situations. activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain curtain airbag.
in the vehicle. airbags are designed to function on a one-
time-only basis.
CAUTION
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
Do not touch the SRS side airbag deployment depend on the level of force
system components around the experienced in the passenger compart-
front seat seatback with bare hands ment during a side impact collision. That
right after deployment. Doing so can level differs from one type of collision to
cause burns because the compo- another, and it may have no bearing on
nents can be very hot as a result of the visible damage done to the vehicle
deployment. itself. Also, the SRS curtain airbags
deploy depending on the vehicles position
CONTINUED
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most 1) A severe side impact near the front seat
or the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
likely deploy. airbag.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
or if the skidding vehicles tires hit a
curbstone laterally.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy. 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.

CONTINUED
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.

CONTINUED
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
in which the SRS side airbag and The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the first impact, they will not be activated
SRS curtain airbag will basically not airbag are basically not designed to on the second.
deploy. deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal ! Example of the type of accident in
collision or is struck from behind. Exam- which the SRS curtain airbag will
ples of such accidents are illustrated. basically not deploy.

1) First impact
2) Second impact The SRS curtain airbags are not basically
A) SRS curtain airbag designed to deploy if the vehicle pitches
B) SRS side airbag end over end.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station- same direction, once the SRS side airbag
ary).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57

& SRS airbag system monitors while the vehicle is being driven. The . Seatbelt pretensioner
SRS airbag system warning light AIR- Drivers side
BAG will show normal system operation Front passengers side
by lighting for approximately 6 seconds . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
when the ignition switch is turned to the gers side)
ON position. . Front passengers seatbelt tension
The following components are monitored sensor
by the indicator: . Front passengers occupant detection
. Front sub sensor system weight sensor
Right-hand side . Front passengers occupant detection
Left-hand side control module
. Airbag control module (including im- . Front passengers frontal airbag ON
pact and rollover sensors) and OFF indicator
Type A . Frontal airbag module . All related wiring
Drivers side
Front passengers side WARNING
. Side airbag sensor If the warning light exhibits any of
Center pillar right-hand side the following conditions, there may
Center pillar left-hand side be a malfunction in the seatbelt
. Side airbag module pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
Drivers side system. Immediately take your vehi-
Front passengers side cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
. Curtain airbag sensor to have the system checked. Unless
Rear wheel house right-hand side checked and properly repaired, the
Rear wheel house left-hand side seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
. Curtain airbag module airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
Type B Right-hand side
increase the risk of injury.
Left-hand side
A diagnostic system continually monitors . Satellite safing sensor (under the rear . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
the readiness of the SRS airbag system center seat) ing light
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
CONTINUED
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

. No illumination of the warning CAUTION nents of the SRS airbag system are
light when the ignition switch is replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
first turned to the ON position If you need service or repair in areas parts.
. Continuous illumination of the indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author- NOTE
warning light
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- In the following cases, contact your
. Illumination of the warning light SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
bag control module, impact sensors
while driving . The front part of the vehicle was
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas. involved in an accident in which only
. Under the center console the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both
& SRS airbag system servicing drivers and front passengers SRS
. On both the right and left sides at frontal airbags did not deploy.
WARNING the front of the vehicle . The pad of the steering wheel, the
. Steering wheel and column and cover over the front passengers SRS
. When discarding an airbag mod- nearby areas frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
ule or scrapping the entire vehi- the front pillar to a point over the rear
cle damaged by a collision, con- . Top of the dashboard on front
passengers side and nearby seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
sult your SUBARU dealer. wise damaged.
areas
. The SRS airbag has no user- . Center pillar, rear wheel house or
serviceable parts. Do not use . Each front seat and nearby area
rear sub frame, or an area near these
electrical test equipment on any . Inside each center pillar parts, was involved in an accident in
circuit related to the SRS airbag . In each roof side (from the front which the SRS side airbag and SRS
system. For required servicing of pillar to a point over the rear seat) curtain airbag did not deploy.
the SRS airbag, consult your . The fabric or leather of either front
. Between the rear seat cushion
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
and rear wheel house on each
ing with or disconnecting the damaged.
side
systems wiring could result in . The rear part of the vehicle was
accidental inflation of the SRS . Under the rear center seat involved in an accident in which no
airbag or could make the system SRS airbag was deployed.
inoperative, which may result in In the event that the SRS airbag is
serious injury. deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59

& Precautions against vehicle . Installation of additional electri- etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
modification cal/electronic equipment such as accessory parts to the side body.
a mobile two-way radio on or
WARNING near the SRS airbag system Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
components and/or wiring is not you want to install any accessory parts on
To avoid accidental activation of the advisable. This could interfere your vehicle.
system or rendering the system with proper operation of the
inoperative, which may result in SRS airbag system.
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system. CAUTION
This includes the following modifi- Do not perform any of the following
cations. modifications. Such modifications
. Installation of custom steering can interfere with proper operation
wheels of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of additional trim . Attachment of any equipment
materials to the dashboard (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
. Installation of custom seats skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
. Replacement of seat fabric or the front end.
leather
. Modification of the suspension
. Installation of additional fabric or system or front end structure.
leather on the front seat
. Installation of a tire of different
. Attachment of a hands-free mi- size and construction from the
crophone or any other accessory tires specified on the vehicle
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a placard attached to the drivers
rear pillar, the windshield, a side door pillar or specified for indivi-
window, an assist grip, or any dual vehicle models in this Own-
other cabin surface that would be ers Manual.
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag. . Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,

Keys and doors

Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Alarm system ..................................................... 2-15


Key number plate ................................................ 2-2 System operation............................................... 2-15
2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-2 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-15
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-3 system ............................................................ 2-16
Key replacement ................................................. 2-3 Arming the system ............................................ 2-16
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-17
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5 Passive arming .................................................. 2-18
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-5 Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-19
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-6 Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-19
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-20
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7 Windows............................................................. 2-20
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-8 Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-20
Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-9 Power window operation by passengers............. 2-23
Unlocking the rear gate ....................................... 2-9 Initialization of power window (type A) ............... 2-23
Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-9 Rear gate ............................................................ 2-23
Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-9 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-25
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10 To open the moonroof ....................................... 2-25
Selecting turn signal lights operation.................. 2-10 To close the moonroof ....................................... 2-25
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-10 Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-26
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-10 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-26
Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-11
2-2 Keys and doors

Keys glove box locked when you leave your Immobilizer


vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

CAUTION CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or FCC WARNING
key case to either key. If it bangs
Changes or modifications not ex-
against your knees while you are
pressly approved by the party re-
driving, it could turn the ignition
sponsible for compliance could void
switch from the ON position to the
the users authority to operate the
Acc or LOCK position, thereby
equipment.
stopping the engine.
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
& Key number plate starting the engine. Only keys registered
1) Master key (black) The key number is stamped on the key with your vehicles immobilizer system can
2) Submaster key (black) number plate attached to the key set. be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
3) Valet key (gray) Write down the key number and keep it in an unregistered key fits into the ignition
4) Key number plate another safe place, not in the vehicle. This switch and can be turned to the START
5) Security ID plate number is needed to make a replacement position, the engine will automatically stop
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the after several seconds.
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle.
vehicle: Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
Master key, submaster key and valet key. For information on making replacement ponder in which the keys ID code is
keys for vehicles with the immobilizer stored. When a key is inserted into the
The master key and submaster key fit all system, refer to Security ID plate F2-3. ignition switch and turned to the ON
locks on your vehicle.
position, the transponder transmits the
. Ignition switch keys ID code to the immobilizer systems
. Drivers door receiver. If the transmitted ID code
. Glove box matches the ID code registered in the
immobilizer system, the system allows the
The valet key fits only the ignition switch engine to be started. Since the ID code is
and drivers door lock. You can keep the transmitted and acted upon almost in-
Keys and doors 2-3

stantly, the immobilizer system does not windows and the moonroof, and lock integrated unit, and combination meter.
impede normal starting of the engine. the doors and rear gate.
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key . Do not leave spare keys or any & Security indicator light
once before trying again. Refer to Ignition record of your key number in the
vehicle. Refer to Security indicator light F3-23.
switch F3-3.
This device complies with Part 15 of & Key replacement
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC & Security ID plate
Your key number plate and security ID
Rules. Operation is subject to the plate will be required if you ever need a
following two conditions: (1) this de- replacement key made. Any new key must
vice may not cause harmful interfer- be registered for use with your vehicles
ence, and (2) this device must accept immobilizer system before it can be used.
any interference received, including Up to four keys can be registered for use
interference that may cause undesired with one vehicle.
operation. For security, all the keys registered with
your vehicles immobilizer system will
CAUTION have their ID codes erased and re-
. Do not place the key under direct registered when a new key is made.
sunlight or anywhere it may Therefore, all of your vehicles keys must
become hot. be presented when a new key is regis-
1) Key number plate
tered. Any key that is not re-registered
. Do not get the key wet. If the key when a new key is made cannot be used
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth 2) Security ID plate
after the other keys are re-registered. For
immediately. The security ID is stamped on the security information on replacement keys and on
ID plate attached to the key set. Write the registration of keys with your immo-
NOTE down the security ID and keep it in bilizer system, contact your SUBARU
another safe place, not in the vehicle. dealer.
To protect your vehicle from theft, This number is needed to make a replace-
please pay close attention to the fol- ment key if you lose your key or lock it NOTE
lowing security precautions. inside the vehicle. A vehicle that is equipped with the
. Never leave your vehicle unattended This number is also needed for replace- remote engine start system as a dealer
with its keys inside. ment or repair of the engine control unit, option can register up to three keys for
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
CONTINUED
2-4 Keys and doors

use with one vehicle. Door locks


& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
NOTE
If you unlock the drivers door with a
key and open the door while the alarm
system is armed, the alarm system is
triggered and the vehicles horn
sounds. In this case, perform any of
the following operations:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter. To lock the drivers door from the outside
. Insert the key into the ignition with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
switch and turn the ignition switch to To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
the ON position. front.
For details about the alarm system, Pull the outside door handle to open an
refer to Alarm system F2-15. unlocked door.
Keys and doors 2-5

doors from the outside without the key. WARNING


& Locking and unlocking from Keep all doors locked when you
the inside drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden-
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward. tally opened, and intruders from
2) Close the door. unexpectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and
then close the door. 1) Lock
2) Unlock & Battery drainage prevention
To lock the door from the outside using the function
power door locking switch, push the front To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
If a door or the rear gate is not completely
side of the switch (LOCK side) and then lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
closed, the interior lights will remain
close the door. In this case, all closed from the inside, rotate the lock lever
illuminated as a result. However, several
doors and the rear gate are locked at the forward.
lights are automatically turned off by the
same time. The red mark on the lock lever appears battery drainage prevention function to
Always make sure that all doors and the when the door is unlocked. prevent the battery from discharging. The
rear gate are locked before leaving your following interior lights are affected by this
Pull the inside door handle to open an function.
vehicle. unlocked door.
NOTE Always make sure that all doors and the
Make sure that you do not leave the key rear gate are closed before starting to
inside the vehicle when locking the drive.
CONTINUED
2-6 Keys and doors

NOTE Power door locking switches


Item Switch Automatically turning
position off . The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as operational.
OFF*1 Approximately 20
Map lights minutes later . When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
Dome light DOOR Approximately 20 gate are completely closed.
minutes later
. The battery drainage prevention
Ignition Approximately 20 function does not operate while the
switch light minutes later
key is in the ignition switch.
Door step None*2
lights
Cargo area DOOR None*2
light

*1: The map lights can be controlled by the


battery drainage prevention function only when 1) Lock
the map light switches are in the OFF position 2) Unlock
and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR
position. For the switch positions, refer to Map All doors and the rear gate can be locked
light F6-3. and unlocked by the power door locking
switches located at the drivers side and
*2: The door step lights and the cargo area light
the front passengers side doors.
are not affected by the battery drainage
prevention function, so the lights do not turn To lock the doors, push the front side of
off automatically. To turn off the lights, it is the switch.
necessary that each door and the rear gate are To unlock the doors, push the rear side of
completely closed. the switch.
The operational/non-operational setting of When you close the doors after you set
this function can be changed by a the door locks, the doors remain locked.
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to change the setting. NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
Keys and doors 2-7

doors from the outside using the power NOTE Remote keyless entry system
door locking switches. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
& Key lock-in prevention func- the doors. CAUTION
tion . Do not expose the remote trans-
This function prevents the doors from mitter to severe shocks, such as
being locked with the key still in the those experienced as a result of
ignition switch. dropping or throwing.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven- . Do not take the remote transmit-
tion function operational ter apart except when replacing
With the drivers door open, the doors are the battery.
automatically kept unlocked even if the . Do not get the remote transmitter
front side of the power door locking switch wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
is pressed. a cloth immediately.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven- . When you carry the remote trans-
tion function non-operational mitter on an airplane, do not
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear press the button of the remote
(LOCK) position with the drivers door transmitter while in the airplane.
open and the drivers door is then closed When any button of the remote
with the lock lever in that position, the transmitter is pressed, radio
drivers door is locked. waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
. If the spare key is used to lock the When you carry the remote trans-
drivers door from the outside of the mitter in a bag on an airplane,
vehicle, the door is locked. take measures to prevent the
The setting of this function to operational/ buttons of the remote transmitter
non-operational status can be changed by from being pressed.
a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU . FCC WARNING
dealer for details. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party

CONTINUED
2-8 Keys and doors

responsible for compliance equipment emitting strong radio waves & Locking the doors
could void the users authority such as a power plant, broadcast station,
to operate the equipment. TV tower, or remote controller of home
electronic appliances.
This device complies with Part 15 of
The keyless entry system does not oper-
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
ate when the key is inserted in the ignition
Rules. Operation is subject to the
switch.
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Two transmitters are provided for your
vehicle. Press the button to lock all doors and
the rear gate. An electronic chirp will
The keyless entry system has the follow- sound once and the turn signal lights will
ing functions. flash once.
. Locking and unlocking the doors and If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
rear gate without a key fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound
. Unlocking the rear gate without a key : Rear gate unlock button five times and the turn signal lights will
. Sounding a panic alarm : Unlock/disarm button flash five times to alert you that the doors
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys- : Lock/arm button or the rear gate are not properly closed.
tem. For detailed information, refer to A: Panic button When you close the door, it will automa-
Alarm system F2-15. 1) Front tically lock and then an electronic chirp will
2) Back sound once and the turn signal lights will
The operable distance of the keyless entry flash once.
system is approximately 30 feet (10
meters). However, this distance will vary
depending on environmental conditions.
The systems operable distance will be
shorter in areas near a facility or electronic
Keys and doors 2-9

& Unlocking the doors & Unlocking the rear gate nation period setting of the interior light in
accordance with your preference. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle finder function


Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
button three times in a 5-second period
will cause your vehicles horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.

Press the button to unlock the drivers Pressing the button unlocks the rear NOTE
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice gate. If the interval between presses is too
and the turn signal lights will flash twice. An electronic chirp will sound twice and short when you press the button
To unlock all doors and the rear gate, the turn signal lights will flash twice. three times, the system may not re-
briefly press the button a second time spond to the signals from the remote
within 5 seconds. & Illuminated entry transmitter.

NOTE The interior (dome) light and the map light


If the interval between the first and will illuminate when the button is
second presses of the button (for pressed. These lights stay illuminated for
unlocking of all of the doors and the approximately 30 seconds if any of the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- doors or the rear gate is not opened.
tem may not respond. If the button is pressed before 30
seconds have elapsed, these lights will
turn off. The lights must be set to the
DOOR position in order for this function
to operate.
A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-

CONTINUED
2-10 Keys and doors

& Sounding a panic alarm non-operational setting can be changed. 4. Open and close the drivers door once
Models with genuine SUBARU naviga- within 10 seconds after step 3.
tion system: 5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to
The setting can be changed using the indicate completion of the setting.
navigation monitor. For details, refer to the
You may have the above settings done by
Owners Manual Supplement for the navi-
your SUBARU dealer. Contact your
gation system.
SUBARU dealer for details. For models
Models without genuine SUBARU navi- with a genuine SUBARU navigation sys-
gation system: tem, the settings can be changed using
The setting can be changed by your the navigation monitor. For details, refer to
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU the Owners Manual Supplement for the
dealer for details. navigation system.

& Selecting audible signal op- & Replacing the battery


A PANIC button is located on the back of eration
the transmitter.
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
CAUTION
To activate the alarm, press the PANIC give you an audible signal when the doors
button once. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn or in the transmitter when repla-
The horn will sound and the turn signal the audible signal off.
lights will flash. cing the battery.
Do the following to deactivate the audible . Be careful not to damage the
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any signal. You can also use the same steps
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a printed circuit board in the trans-
to restore the function. mitter when replacing the battery.
button on the remote is pressed, the alarm 1. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all
will be deactivated after approximately 30 doors and the rear gate. . Be careful not to allow children to
seconds. touch the battery and any re-
2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the moved parts; children could
power door locking switch.
& Selecting turn signal lights swallow them.
3. While holding down the UNLOCK
operation side of the power door locking switch, pull . There is a danger of explosion if
When the remote keyless entry system is the key out and re-insert it into the ignition an incorrect replacement battery
used, the turn signal lights flash. However, switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds is used. Replace only with the
the turn signal lights flashing operational/ after step 2. same or equivalent type of bat-
Keys and doors 2-11

tery. () side facing up.


. Batteries should not be exposed 4. Refit the removed half of the transmit-
to excessive heat such as sun- ter case.
shine, fire or the like. After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
When the transmitter battery begins to get keyless entry systems control unit.
weak, transmitter range will begin to Press either the or button six
decrease. Replace the battery as soon times to synchronize the unit.
as possible.
To replace the battery: & Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
2. Remove the old battery from the
program all of your transmitters for secur-
holder.
ity reasons. It is recommended that you
have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with
a special code learning feature that allows
you to program new transmitter codes into
the system or to delete old ones. The
1. Open the transmitter case using a flat- system can learn up to four unique
head screwdriver. transmitter codes. The four transmitter
codes may be the same or different.

1) Negative () side facing up

3. Replace with a new battery (type


CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to
install the new battery with the negative
CONTINUED
2-12 Keys and doors

Programming transmitter codes into program the transmitters code (identifica-


system: tion number) into the system. A label
showing the code is affixed to the bag
containing the transmitter, and another is
affixed to the circuit board inside the
transmitter. If there is no bag, open the
transmitter case and make a note of the
eight-digit number. Program the number
into the system in accordance with the
following procedure:
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
gate.
2. Open the drivers door, sit on the
drivers seat, and close the door. 1) ON
2) LOCK
3. Perform the following steps within 45
Bag containing transmitter
seconds. (2) Insert the key into the ignition
switch, then turn it from the LOCK
position to the ON position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. Neither an electronic tone nor
the buzzer will sound, and the interior
lamp will not flash. In this event, per-
form the whole procedure again begin-
Transmitter circuit board ning with part 1.
(1) Open and close the drivers door
To register a new transmitter with the once. 4. Open and close the door once within
keyless entry system, it is necessary to 15 seconds.
Keys and doors 2-13
NOTE NOTE switch within 5 seconds.
. When part 4 of the procedure is . The electronic tone will stop sound-
completed, an electronic tone will ing when you start entering the num- NOTE
sound for 30 seconds. ber. . An electronic tone will sound.
. If you do not perform the operations . If you do not start entering the . If you push the unlock side of the
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error number using the lock switch before lock switch when more than 5 seconds
will occur and the electronic tone will the electronic tone stops sounding, an have passed, an error will occur. In this
not sound. In this event, perform the error will occur. In this event, perform event, perform the procedure again
registration steps again beginning with the registration steps again beginning beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
part 3 of the procedure. with part 3 of the procedure. six times, perform the procedure again
. If the interval between one push of starting with part 3.
the switch and the next exceeds 5 7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure
seconds, an error will occur. In this for each of the remaining digits of the
event, perform the procedure again transmitter code beginning with the sec-
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs ond digit (counting from the left) and
six times, perform the procedure again finishing with the eighth digit.
starting with part 3.
NOTE
. When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for
30 seconds.
. If the interval between one push of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
5. Before the electronic tone stops seconds, an error will occur. In this
sounding, push the lock side of the power event, perform the procedure again
door lock switch the same number of beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
times as the leftmost digit of the transmit- six times, perform the procedure again
ter code. For example, push the lock starting with part 3.
switch eight times if the leftmost digit of 8. Before the electronic tone stops
the code is 8. sounding, use the power door lock switch
6. When you have finished entering the to reenter the transmitter code beginning
number, push the unlock side of the lock with the leftmost digit.
CONTINUED
2-14 Keys and doors

NOTE 11. Test every registered transmitter to system, allowing them unauthorized
If you do not start entering the number confirm correct operation. access to your vehicle.
using the lock switch before the elec-
tronic tone stops sounding, an error ! Deleting old transmitter codes
will occur. In this event, perform the The control unit of the keyless entry
procedure again beginning with part 3. system has four memory locations to store
9. When you have finished entering the transmitter codes, giving it the ability to
code a second time, an electronic tone will operate with up to four transmitters. When
sound for 1 second and automatic door you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-
locking and unlocking operation will take ters code remains in the memory. For
place once to indicate completion of security reasons, lost transmitter codes
registration, provided the code entered should be deleted from the memory.
the second time is identical to that entered To delete old transmitter codes, program
the first time. four transmitter codes into the system. If
you have only one current transmitter,
NOTE program it four times. If you have two
If the code entered the second time is current transmitters, program each one
not identical to the code entered the twice. If you have three current transmit-
first time, an error will occur. In this ters, program two of them once and the
event, perform the procedure again third one twice. This process will leave
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs only current transmitter codes in the
five times, perform the procedure again systems memory.
starting with part 3.
NOTE
10. If you wish to program another trans- Make sure no one else is operating
mitter code into the system (up to four their keyless entry system within range
transmitter codes can be programmed into of your vehicle when programming
the system), perform the procedure begin- transmitters. If someone else were to
ning with part 4. When you have finished operate their remote transmitter while
programming all of the necessary trans- you are programming your transmit-
mitter codes into the system, remove the ters, it is possible that their transmitter
key from the ignition switch. code will be programmed into your
Keys and doors 2-15

Alarm system closed while the horn is sounding, the & Activating and deactivating
horn will stop sounding with a delay of up the alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your to 30 seconds.
To change the setting of your vehicles
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn The alarm is triggered by: alarm system for activation or deactiva-
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if tion, do the following.
someone attempts to break into your . Opening any of the doors or the rear
gate 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
vehicle. The starter motor is also inter-
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as Disarming the system F2-17.
rupted to prevent starting the vehicle
without a key. forced entry (only vehicles with shock 2. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all
sensors (dealer option)) doors and the rear gate.
The system can be armed and disarmed 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
with the remote transmitter. NOTE position.
The system does not operate when the The alarm system can be set to trigger 4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the
key is inserted into the ignition switch. the illumination of the following interior drivers power door locking switch, open
lights. the drivers door within the following 1
Your vehicles alarm system has been set
. Dome light (illuminates only when second, and wait 10 seconds without
for activation at the time of shipment from
the dome light switch is in the DOOR releasing the switch. The setting will then
the factory. You can set the system for
position) be changed as follows.
deactivation yourself or have it done by
. Map lights (illuminate only when the
your SUBARU dealer. If the system was previously activated:
door interlock switch is in the DOOR
position) The odometer/trip meter screen displays
& System operation AL oF and the horn sounds twice,
The alarm system will give the following The notifications regarding the dome indicating that the system is now deacti-
alarms when triggered. light and the map lights are deactivated vated.
. The vehicles horn will sound for 30 as the factory setting. A SUBARU
dealer can activate the system. Contact If the system was previously deacti-
seconds.
your SUBARU dealer for details. vated:
. The turn signal lights will flash for 30 The odometer/trip meter screen displays
seconds. AL on and the horn sounds once,
If any of the doors or the rear gate remains indicating that the system is now acti-
open after the 30-second period, the horn vated.
will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
minutes. If the door or the rear gate is
CONTINUED
2-16 Keys and doors

NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-


gered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the remote trans-
mitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
: Press to Arm the system. Type B
: Press to Disarm the system.
& Arming the system 6. Briefly press the button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors and the rear
! To arm the system using remote gate will lock, an electronic chirp will
transmitter sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if once, and the security indicator light will
equipped). start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing
2. Remove the key from the ignition for 30 seconds (standby time), the security
switch. indicator light will then flash slowly (twice
3. Open the doors and get out of the approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
vehicle. ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked. If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
5. Close all doors and the rear gate. fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
Type A five times, the turn signal lights flash five
times to alert you that the doors or the rear
gate are not properly closed. When you
close the door, the system will automati-
cally arm and the doors will be automati-
Keys and doors 2-17

cally locked. once and the indicator lights will start Ignition switch is turned to the
! To arm the system using power flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 ON position.
door locking switches seconds (standby time), the indicator
lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi- & Disarming the system
1. Close all windows. mately every 2 seconds), indicating that Briefly press the button (for less than
2. Remove the key from the ignition the system has been armed for surveil- 2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
switch. lance. drivers door will unlock, an electronic
3. Open the doors and get out of the chirp will sound twice, the turn signal
vehicle. NOTE lights will flash twice. The flashing of the
4. Make sure that the engine hood is . The system can be armed even if the security indicator light will then change
locked. engine hood, the windows and/or slowly (once approximately every 3 sec-
5. Close the doors and the rear gate but moonroof (if equipped) are open. Al- onds from twice approximately every 2
leave only the drivers door or the front ways make sure that they are fully seconds), indicating that the alarm system
passengers door open. closed before arming the system. has been disarmed.
. The 30-second standby time can be NOTE
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
After disarming the alarm system,
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
briefly press the button a second
. The system is in the standby mode
time within 5 seconds to unlock all
for a 30-second period after locking the
other doors and the rear gate.
doors with the remote transmitter. The
security indicator light will flash at ! Emergency disarming
short intervals during this period.
If you cannot disarm the system using the
. If any of the following actions are
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
done during the standby period, the
broken or the transmitter battery is too
system will not switch to the surveil-
weak), you can disarm the system without
lance state.
using the transmitter as follows.
Doors are unlocked using the
remote transmitter. . Turn the ignition switch from the
6. Push the front side (LOCK side) of
LOCK to the ON position with a
the power door locking switch to set the Any door (including the rear
registered key.
door locks. gate) is opened.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
CONTINUED
2-18 Keys and doors

! Arming the system


& Valet mode LOCK position and remove the key from
When you choose the valet mode, the the ignition switch.
CAUTION 3. Open the doors and get out of the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only In passive mode, the system will vehicle.
for locking and unlocking the doors and automatically activate the alarm but
rear gate and panic activation. WILL NOT automatically lock the
doors. In order to lock the doors
To enter the valet mode, change the
you must either lock them as in-
setting of your vehicles alarm system for
dicated in step 4 below or with the
deactivation mode. Refer to Activating
key once they have been closed.
and deactivating the alarm system F2-
Failure to lock the doors manually
15. The security indicator light will con-
will result in a higher security risk.
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicles alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to Activating and deactivat- 4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
ing the alarm system F2-15. with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will
& Passive arming automatically arm after 1 minute.
When passive arming mode has been In the passive mode, the system can also
programmed by the dealer, arming of the be armed with the remote transmitter or
system is automatically accomplished with the power door locking switches. If
without using the remote transmitter. Note the remote transmitter or power door
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
MANUALLY LOCKED. arming will take place immediately regard-
! To enter the passive mode 1) ON
less of whether or not the passive mode
2) LOCK has been selected.
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer. 2. Turn the ignition switch from ON to
Keys and doors 2-19

! Disarming the system & Shock sensors (dealer op- Examples:


To disarm the system, briefly press the tion) Vibration from a construction site
button on the transmitter. The shock sensors trigger the alarm Vibration in a multistory car park
system when they sense impacts applied Vibration from trains
& Tripped sensor identification . You can have the sensitivity of the
to the vehicle and when any of their
The security indicator light flashes when electric wires are cut. The alarm system shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
the alarm system has been triggered. causes the horn to sound and the turn ference by your SUBARU dealer.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the signal lights to flash for a short time when
location of unauthorized intrusion or the the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
severity of impact on the vehicle. a strong impact or multiple impacts by
When the ignition switch is turned to the sounding the horn and flashing the turn
ON position, the indicator light will light signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
for 1 second and then flash as follows. seconds.
. When a door or rear gate was opened: If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
5 times connect them and set them for activation
. When the ignition switch was turned to or deactivation.
the ON position: 3 times NOTE
. When a strong impact or multiple . The shock sensors are not always
impacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles able to sense impacts caused by break-
with shock sensors (dealer option)) ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
. When a light impact was sensed: once does not cause vibration (such as
(only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer breaking the glass using a rescue
option)) hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
NOTE bration as indicated in the following
Any of the above indicator light flash- examples and trigger the alarm system.
ings will recur each time the ignition Select the settings of the alarm system
switch is turned to the ON position. and shock sensors appropriately de-
Rearming the alarm system cancels the pending on where you usually park
flashing. your vehicle.
2-20 Keys and doors

Child safety locks Windows & Power window operation by


driver
WARNING ! Drivers side power window
switches
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyones fingers, arms,
neck or head from being caught
in the window.
. Always lock the passengers win-
Each rear door has a child safety lock that dows using the lock switch when
prevents the door from being opened even children are riding in the vehicle.
if the inside door handle is pulled. . Before leaving the vehicle, al-
When the child safety lock lever is in the 1) Lock switch
ways remove the key from the 2) For drivers window
lock position, the door cannot be opened ignition switch for safety and
from inside regardless of the position of 3) For front passengers window
never allow an unattended child 4) For rear left window
the inner door handle lock lever. The door to remain in the vehicle. Failure 5) For rear right window
can only be opened from the outside. to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat- All door windows can be controlled by the
WARNING ing the power window. power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
Always turn the child safety locks to
the LOCK position when children The power windows operate only when
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury the ignition switch is in the ON position.
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Keys and doors 2-21

! Operating the drivers window (type To close: ! Operating the drivers window
A) Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The (type B)
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto up
function that allows the window to be
closed fully without holding the switch.
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, press the switch
down lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicles battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
1) Automatically open/close fuse replacement, the one-touch auto 1) Open
2) Open/close up/down function is deactivated. Initi- 2) Automatically open
alize the power window to reactivate 3) Close
To open:
the one-touch auto up/down function. To open:
Press the switch down lightly and hold it. Refer to Initialization of power window
The window will open as long as the Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
(type A) F2-23. The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto switch is held.
down function that allows the window to This switch also has a one-touch auto
be opened fully without holding the switch. down feature that allows the window to be
Press the switch down until it clicks and opened fully without holding the switch.
release it, and the window will fully open. Push the switch down until it clicks and
To stop the window halfway, pull the release it, and the window will fully open.
switch up lightly. To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.

CONTINUED
2-22 Keys and doors

To close: fer to Initialization of power window ! Locking the passengers windows


Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The (type A) F2-23.
window will close as long as the switch is While closing automatically, if the window
held. senses a substantial enough object
! Anti-entrapment function (type A) trapped between the window and the
window frame, it automatically moves
CAUTION down slightly and stops.
! Operating the passengers win-
. Never attempt to test this func-
dows
tion using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes. 1) Lock
2) Unlock
Push the lock switch. When the lock
NOTE switch is in the LOCK position, the
. If a window detects an impact simi- passengers windows cannot be opened
lar to that caused by trapping an object or closed.
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
Push the switch again to cancel the
over a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
passengers window locking.
ment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for To open:
a few seconds after the anti-entrap- Push the appropriate switch down and
ment function operates. hold it until the window reaches the
. If the vehicles battery is discon- desired position.
nected due to situations such as To close:
battery or fuse replacement, the anti- Pull the switch up and hold it until the
entrapment function is deactivated. window reaches the desired position.
Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
Keys and doors 2-23

& Power window operation by & Initialization of power win- Rear gate
passengers dow (type A)
Each passenger window can be controlled If the vehicles battery is disconnected due
by the power window switch located on to situations such as battery or fuse
the door. replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Initialize the power window in the following
procedure to reactivate such functions.
1. Close the drivers door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
3. Open the drivers side window halfway The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
by pushing down the power window using any of the following systems.
switch. . Power door locking switch: Refer to
4. Pull up the power window switch and Power door locking switches F2-6.
To open: close the window completely. Continue
Push the switch down and hold it until the . Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
pulling up the switch for approximately 1 Remote keyless entry system F2-7.
window reaches the desired position. second after the window is closed com-
To close: pletely. To open:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the Unlock the rear gate and push the rear
window reaches the desired position. gate opener button to open the rear gate.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
drivers side door, is in the LOCK
position, the passengers windows cannot
be operated with the passengers
switches.

CONTINUED
2-24 Keys and doors

. Do not attempt to shut the rear procedure, refer to Rear gate if the
gate while holding the recessed rear gate cannot be opened F9-18.
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.

CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
To close: gate stays or scratch the stays
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down while loading or unloading cargo.
firmly until the latch engages. That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
in their inability to hold the rear
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
gate open.
WARNING . Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
. To prevent dangerous exhaust ing or closing the rear gate and
gas from entering the vehicle, when loading or unloading car-
always keep the rear gate closed go.
while driving.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
Keys and doors 2-25

Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en- The moonroof operates only when the
trapment function by deliberately ignition switch is in the ON position.
placing part of your body in the
WARNING moonroof. & To open the moonroof
Never let anyones hands, arms, Pull the switch to the OPEN side and
head or any objects protrude from quickly release it to open the moonroof.
CAUTION The sun shade will also be opened
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open together with the moonroof. The moonroof
suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof. will stop at a position 20 in (50 cm) away
vehicle is involved in an accident. from the fully closed position. Pull the
. Do not operate the moonroof if switch again to open the moonroof com-
To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold pletely.
caused by entrapment, always con- conditions have caused it to
form to the following instructions freeze shut. To stop the moonroof at a desired position,
without exception. momentarily push the switch to the
. Before closing the moonroof, CLOSE or OPEN side.
make sure that no ones hands, After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
arms, head or other objects will wipe away water on the roof prior to
be accidentally caught in the opening the moonroof to prevent drops
moonroof. of water from falling into the passenger
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- compartment.
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and & To close the moonroof
never allow an unattended child Push the switch to the CLOSE side then
to remain in the vehicle. Failure quickly release it to close the moonroof.
to follow this procedure could The moonroof will stop at a position 8 in
result in injury to a child operat- (20 cm) away from the fully closed
ing the moonroof. 1) Open/close switch position. Push the switch again to close
2) Open the moonroof completely.
3) Close
To stop the moonroof at a desired position,
momentarily push the switch to the
CONTINUED
2-26 Keys and doors

CLOSE or OPEN side. . If the moonroof cannot be closed & Sun shade
through switch operation because of
& Anti-entrapment function system failure, it can be closed manu-
When the moonroof senses a substantial ally using a hex-head wrench. For the
enough object trapped between its glass procedure, refer to Moonroof if the
and the vehicles roof during closure, it moonroof cannot be closed F9-19.
automatically moves back by 6 in (15 cm)
from that point and then stops. The anti-
entrapment function may also be activated
by a strong shock on the moonroof even
when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function The sun shade can be slid forward or
using fingers, hands or other parts backward by hand while the moonroof is
of your body. closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
NOTE also moves back.
. For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
. Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to gen-
erate at high speeds. If such a condi-
tion has been encountered, use the
moonroof at the initial stop position of
20 in (50 cm) away from the fully closed
position.
Instruments and controls

Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3 Coolant temperature low indicator light (if
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 equipped)/Coolant temperature high warning
Acc..................................................................... 3-4 light (if equipped)............................................. 3-16
ON...................................................................... 3-4 Charge warning light.......................................... 3-17
START ................................................................ 3-4 Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-17 3
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5 AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT models).............. 3-18
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-5 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-18
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5 ABS warning light.............................................. 3-19
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-6 Brake system warning light................................ 3-20
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-6 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-21
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle Hill start assist warning light (MT models) .......... 3-21
movement upon turning on the ignition Door open warning light .................................... 3-21
switch............................................................... 3-6
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT models) .......... 3-21
Meter needles/gauge illumination setting (models
with type A combination meter) ......................... 3-7 Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
(models with HID headlights)............................ 3-22
Speedometer....................................................... 3-8
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Odometer/Trip meter............................................ 3-8 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-22
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-10 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-23
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10 Security indicator light....................................... 3-23
Temperature gauge (models with type A SPORT mode indicator light (AT models) ............ 3-24
combination meter) .......................................... 3-11
Select lever and gear position indicator (AT
ECO gauge (models with type A combination models) ........................................................... 3-24
meter) .............................................................. 3-12
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-25
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-12 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-25
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-13
Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-25
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-25
Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators......................................................... 3-15 Front fog light indicator light (if equipped).......... 3-25
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-25
indicator lamp .................................................. 3-16
Instruments and controls

Clock ................................................................... 3-25 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-32


Information display ............................................ 3-26 Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-32
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-27 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-33
Current fuel consumption (if equipped) ............... 3-28 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-34
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-28 Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 3-36
To turn off fuel consumption indicator Mirrors ................................................................ 3-36
display............................................................. 3-28 Inside mirror...................................................... 3-36
Light control switch ........................................... 3-29 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-37
Headlights.......................................................... 3-30 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-30 (if equipped) .................................................... 3-38
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-30 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-44
Daytime running light system (if equipped) ......... 3-31 Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-45
Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-47
HID headlights) ................................................ 3-31
Horn .................................................................... 3-47
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-31
Instruments and controls 3-3

Ignition switch tion to the Acc or LOCK posi- battery to go dead.


tion, thereby stopping the engine. . If the ignition switch will not move
Also, if the key is attached to a from the LOCK position to the Acc
WARNING keyholder or to a large bunch of position, turn the steering wheel
other keys, centrifugal force may act slightly to the left and right as you turn
. Never turn the ignition switch to on it as the vehicle moves, resulting the ignition switch.
LOCK while the vehicle is in unwanted turning of the ignition
being driven or towed because switch. & LOCK
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And The key can only be inserted or removed
when the engine is turned off, it in this position. The ignition switch will lock
takes a much greater effort than the steering wheel when you remove the
usual to steer. key.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- If turning the key is difficult, turn the
ways remove the key from the steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ignition switch for safety and as you turn the key.
never allow an unattended child ! Automatic transmission models
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even The ignition switch has four positions:
make the vehicle move. LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
NOTE
CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the
LOCK position when the engine is
Do not attach a large key holder or not running.
key case to either key. If it banged . Using electrical accessories for a
against your knees or hands while long time with the ignition switch in the
you are driving, it could turn the ON or Acc position can cause the
ignition switch from the ON posi-
CONTINUED
3-4 Instruments and controls

while turning it. NOTE


The engine may not start in the follow-
& Acc ing cases:
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.

& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.

& START
The key can be turned from Acc to The engine is started in this position. The
LOCK only when the select lever is in the starter cranks the engine to start it. When
P position. the key is released (after the engine has
! Manual transmission models started), the key automatically returns to . The key grip is touching another key
the ON position. or a metallic key holder.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
START position while the engine
is running.

If your registered key fails to start the


engine, pull out the key once (the security
indicator light will blink), and then insert
the key in the ignition switch and turn it to
the START position and again try to start
the engine.
The key can be turned from Acc to
LOCK only when the key is pushed in . The key is near another key that
Instruments and controls 3-5

contains an immobilizer transponder. following conditions. Hazard warning flasher


. The key is near or touching another . when the ignition switch is turned to the
transmitter. ON position
. when all doors and the rear gate are
& Key reminder chime locked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter
The reminder chime sounds when the
drivers door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the LOCK or Acc position.
The chime stops under the following
conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position
. when the key is removed from the
ignition switch
The hazard warning flasher is used to
. when the drivers door is closed
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
& Ignition switch light The hazard warning flasher works regard-
For easy access to the ignition switch in less of the position of the ignition switch.
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when the drivers door is opened or To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
when the drivers door is unlocked using push the hazard warning button on the
the remote keyless entry transmitter. instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
push the button again.
The light remains illuminated for a short
time and then gradually turns off under the NOTE
following conditions. When the hazard warning flasher is on,
. when the drivers door is closed the turn signals do not work.
. when the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The light turns off immediately under the
3-6 Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges & Canceling the function for


meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
NOTE ignition switch
Liquid-crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges on
the combination meter. You will find
their indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-


tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the Type B
ON position, the various parts of the It is possible to activate or deactivate the
combination meter are illuminated in the movement of the meter needles and
following sequence: gauge needles that takes place when the
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter ignition switch is turned to the ON
needles, gauge needles, odometer and Type A
position.
trip meter back light illuminate. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
2. Meters and gauges each show MAX or Acc position.
position. 2. Press the trip knob to show /
3. Meters and gauges each show MIN or / on the odometer/trip meter
position. display.
4. Dials and indicators in meters and The display can be switched as shown in
gauges light up. the following illustration by pressing the
5. Regular illumination (for driving) be- trip knob.
gins.
Instruments and controls 3-7

Type A: / : Activated The needles and gauge do not illuminate


/ : Deactivated when the drivers door is opened while the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE The illumination turns off immediately after
. Your vehicles initial movement the ignition switch is turned from the ON
setting of the meter/gauge needles position to the LOCK position.
has been set for activation /
at the time of shipment from the NOTE
factory. . Even during the illumination after
. It is not possible to cancel the initial the drivers door is opened, if the
movement setting of the meter/gauge ignition switch is turned to the ON
*: or , and or cannot needles when the ignition switch is in position, the combination meter will
be displayed when the ignition switch is the ON position. Cancel the setting illuminate as usual.
in the ON position. when the ignition switch is in the . If the doors are locked by the remote
Type B: LOCK or Acc position. keyless entry system during the illumi-
nation after the drivers door is opened,
& Meter needles/gauge illumi- the illumination will be turned off.
nation setting (models with . Even during the gradual turning off
type A combination meter) after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position, if the ignition switch
When the setting is activated or deacti- is turned to the ON position, the
vated, the meter needles and gauge combination meter illuminate as usual.
illuminate and turn off as follows.
To change the setting:
Activated: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
When the drivers door is opened while or Acc position.
*: or cannot be displayed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
the ignition switch is in the ON posi- position, the needles and gauge illuminate
tion. and turn off after approximately 20 sec-
onds. The illumination gradually turns off
3. To change the current setting, press after the ignition switch is turned from the
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds. ON position to the LOCK position.
Deactivated:

CONTINUED
3-8 Instruments and controls

: Activated & Odometer/Trip meter


: Deactivated
NOTE
The initial illumination setting of the
meter needles/gauge of your vehicle
has been set for activation at the
time of shipment from the factory.

& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.

2. Press the trip knob to show or


on the trip meter display. The display Type A
can be switched as shown in the following 1) Trip knob
illustration by pressing the trip knob.

*: or , and or cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the ON position. Type B
3. To change the current setting, press 1) Trip knob
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
Instruments and controls 3-9

This meter displays the odometer and two Type B:


trip meters when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK or Acc position,
the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch the indications while the
odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do not
press the trip knob within 10 seconds of
illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the
odometer/trip meter will turn off.
*: or cannot be displayed when
The display can be switched as shown in the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
the following illustrations by pressing the tion. Type B
trip knob. The odometer shows the total distance
! Odometer
that the vehicle has been driven.
Type A:
! Double trip meter

*: or , and or cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the ON position. Type A

Type A

CONTINUED
3-10 Instruments and controls

reason such as vehicle maintenance or


fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.

& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
Type B Type B
mage to the engine.
The trip meter shows the distance that the 1) Low fuel warning light
vehicle has been driven since you last set The fuel gauge shows the approximate
it to zero. & Fuel gauge amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A When the ignition switch is in the LOCK
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob or Acc position, the fuel gauge is off
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 (type A)/the fuel gauge shows E (type B)
seconds. even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
CAUTION The fuel gauge indication may change
slightly during braking, turning or accel-
To ensure safety, do not attempt to eration due to fuel level movement in the
change the function of the indicator tank.
during driving, as an accident could If you press the trip knob while the ignition
result. switch is in the LOCK or Acc position,
the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
NOTE
Type A If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the
If the connection between the combina- amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you
tion meter and battery is broken for any 1) Low fuel warning light
Instruments and controls 3-11

(a) do not press the trip knob for 10 NOTE The temperature gauge shows engine
seconds or (b) open and close the drivers This light does not turn off unless the coolant temperature when the ignition
door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off. tank is replenished up to an internal switch is in the ON position.
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
NOTE gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
CAUTION
We recommend that you drive moderately
Promptly put fuel in the tank when- until the pointer of the temperature gauge
ever the low fuel warning light reaches near the middle of the range.
illuminates. Engine misfires as a Engine operation is optimum with the
result of an empty tank could cause engine coolant at this temperature range
damage to the engine. and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
& Temperature gauge (models
with type A combination me- CAUTION
ter) If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
You will see the sign in the fuel vehicle as soon as possible.
gauge.
Refer to Engine overheating F9-
This indicates that the fuel filler door 13.
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty [approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp
gal)]. It only operates when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
1) Normal operating range
CONTINUED
3-12 Instruments and controls

& ECO gauge (models with type NOTE Warning and indicator lights
A combination meter) . The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication. Several of the warning and indicator lights
. After resetting the trip meter, the illuminate momentarily and then turn off
average rate of fuel consumption is not when the ignition switch is initially turned
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). to the ON position. This permits check-
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not ing the operation of the bulbs.
operate. Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several sec-
onds or after the engine has started.
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the
The unit displayed varies depending on seatbelt.)
the destination.
The ECO gauge shows the difference : Front passengers seatbelt warning
between the average rate of fuel con- light
sumption since the trip meter was last (The seatbelt warning light turns off
reset and the current rate of fuel con- only when the front seat passenger
sumption. fastens the seatbelt.)

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel : SRS airbag system warning light
efficiency as shown in the following chart. ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag
ON indicator light
Needle pointing
Displayed unit / : Front passengers frontal airbag
+ side - side
OFF indicator light
MPG Better Poorer
l/100km Poorer Better : CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator lamp
Instruments and controls 3-13

: Coolant temperature high warning light : Automatic headlight beam leveler


(if equipped) warning light (models with HID head-
lights)
: Charge warning light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
: Oil pressure warning light burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
: AT OIL TEMP warning light corresponding system.
(AT models) Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
: Low tire pressure warning light
(U.S.- spec. models) & Seatbelt warning light
/ : ABS warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
/ : Brake system warning light warning device at the drivers and front Drivers warning light (type A)
: Low fuel warning light passengers seat, as required by current
safety standards.
: Hill start assist warning light With the ignition switch turned to the ON
(MT models) position, this device reminds the driver
: Door open warning light and front passenger to fasten their seat-
belts by illuminating the warning lights in
: AWD warning light (AT models) the locations indicated in the following
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning illustration and sounding a chime.
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light
Drivers warning light (type B)
: SPORT mode indicator light
(AT models)
: Cruise control indicator light
SET/ : Cruise control set indicator light
CONTINUED
3-14 Instruments and controls

The warning light(s) for unfastened pull the seatback.


seatbelt(s) will alternate between . Do not use front seats with their back-
steady illumination and flashing at ward-forward position and seatback not
15-second intervals. The chime will being locked into place securely. If any of
not sound. them are not locked securely, adjust them
At speeds higher than approxi- again. For the adjustment procedure of
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) the manual seats, refer to Manual seat
The warning light(s) for unfastened F1-3.
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at If the seatbelt warning device for the front
15-second intervals and the chime passengers seat does not function cor-
will sound while the warning light(s) rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
is/are flashing. front passengers seat is empty or it is
Front passengers warning light deactivated even when the front passen-
If there is no passenger on the front ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
! Operation passengers seat, the seatbelt warning take the following actions.
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ device for the front passengers seat will
be deactivated. The front passengers . Ensure that no article is placed on the
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when seat other than a child restraint system
the ignition switch is turned to the ON occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on and its child occupant, although we
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will strongly recommend that all children sit
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the the front passengers seat.
in the rear seat properly restrained.
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- Observe the following precautions. Failure . Ensure that there is no article left in the
vers seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will to do so may prevent the device from seatback pocket.
also sound simultaneously. functioning correctly or cause the device . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
to fail. sition and seatback of front passengers
NOTE . Do not install any accessory such as a seat are locked into place securely by
. If the drivers and/or front passen- table or TV onto the seatback. moving the seat back and forth.
gers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
. Do not store a heavy load in the
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning If still the seatbelt warning device for front
seatback pocket.
device operates as follows according passengers seat does not function cor-
to the vehicle speed. . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
At speeds lower than approxi- tions described above, immediately con-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) passengers seatback, or allow him/her to
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
Instruments and controls 3-15

tion. & Front passengers frontal indicators illuminates depending on the


airbag ON and OFF indica- status of the front passengers SRS frontal
& SRS airbag system tors airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
warning light vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag
WARNING is activated, the passengers frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
If the warning light exhibits any of indicator will remain off.
the following conditions, there may If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag
be a malfunction in the seatbelt is deactivated, the passengers frontal
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag airbag ON indicator will remain off while
system. Immediately take your vehi- the OFF indicator will illuminate.
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless With the ignition switch turned to the ON
checked and properly repaired, the position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
airbag will not operate properly in neously even after the system check
the event of a collision, which may ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON period, the system is malfunctioning.
increase the risk of injury. indicator Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF ately for an inspection.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- indicator
ing light
The front passengers frontal airbag ON
. No illumination of the warning and OFF indicators show you the status of
light when the ignition switch is the front passengers SRS frontal airbag.
first turned to the ON position The indicators are located next to the
. Continuous illumination of the clock in the center portion of the dash-
warning light board.
. Illumination of the warning light When the ignition switch is turned to the
while driving ON position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
CONTINUED
3-16 Instruments and controls

& CHECK ENGINE warn- NOTE several driving trips. You should have your
ing light/Malfunction in- This light also illuminates when the fuel vehicle checked by an authorized
dicator lamp filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. SUBARU dealer immediately.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
CAUTION the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
& Coolant temperature
light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on low indicator light (if
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi- could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. equipped)/Coolant tem-
nates while you are driving, have Remove the cap and retighten it until it perature high warning
your vehicle checked/repaired by clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering light (if equipped)
your SUBARU dealer as soon as with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
possible. Continued vehicle opera- cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE CAUTION
tion without having the emission warning light turn off immediately. It may
control system checked and re- take several driving trips. If the light does . After turning the ignition switch
paired as necessary could cause not turn off, take your vehicle to your to the ON position, if this
serious damage, which may not be authorized SUBARU dealer immediately. indicator light/warning light be-
covered by your vehicles warranty. haves under any of the following
! If the light is blinking conditions, the electrical system
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks If the light is blinking while driving, an may be malfunctioning. Contact
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de- your SUBARU dealer immedi-
that there is a problem or potential tected which may damage the emission ately for an inspection.
problem somewhere in the emission con- control system. It remains blinking in RED.
trol system. To prevent serious damage to the emis-
It remains illuminated in RED
! If the light illuminates steadily sion control system, you should do the
for more than 2 seconds.
following.
If the light illuminates steadily while driving It remains blinking in RED and
. Reduce vehicle speed.
or does not turn off after the engine starts, BLUE alternately.
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades. . While driving, if this indicator
has been detected. light/warning light behaves under
You should have your vehicle checked by . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
any of the following conditions,
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ble.
take the specified appropriate
ately. measure listed below.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after Blinking or illuminated in
Instruments and controls 3-17

RED: tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light indicator light/warning light turns off
Safely stop the vehicle as turns off when the engine is warmed up after a short time.
soon as possible, and refer sufficiently.
to the emergency steps for the & Charge warning light
If the engine coolant temperature in-
engine overheating. After-
creases over the specified range, the If this light illuminates when the engine is
ward, have the system
indicator light/warning light blinks in running, it may indicate that the charging
checked by your nearest
RED. At this time, the engine is close to system is not working properly.
SUBARU dealer. Refer to En-
overheating.
gine overheating F9-13. If the light illuminates while driving or does
Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in- not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning engine at the first safe opportunity and
The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At check the alternator belt. If the belt is
malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating. loose, broken or if the belt is in good
SUBARU dealer for an inspec- When the indicator light/warning light condition but the light remains on, contact
tion. blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and ately.
This coolant temperature low indicator refer to the emergency steps for the
light/coolant temperature high warning engine overheating. Refer to Engine & Oil pressure warning
light has the following three functions. overheating F9-13. Afterward, have the light
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- system checked by your nearest
cient warming up of the engine If this light illuminates when the engine is
SUBARU dealer. running, it may indicate that the engine oil
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
Also, if the indicator light/warning light pressure is low and the lubricating system
engine is close to overheating
often blinks in RED, the electrical system is not working properly.
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
may be malfunctioning. Contact your If the light illuminates while driving or does
ing condition of the engine
SUBARU dealer for an inspection. not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
For the system check, this indicator light/ engine at the first safe opportunity and
warning light illuminates in RED for NOTE check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
approximately 2 seconds when the igni- If the engine is restarted after a certain low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
tion switch is turned to the ON position. driving condition, this indicator light/ at the proper level but the light remains on,
After that, this indicator light/warning light warning light may illuminate in RED. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- However, this is not a malfunction if the immediately.

CONTINUED
3-18 Instruments and controls

CAUTION & Low tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
warning light (U.S.-spec. can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Do not operate the engine with the models) reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
oil pressure warning light on. This and may affect the vehicles handling and
may cause serious engine damage. When the ignition switch is turned to the stopping ability.
ON position, the low tire pressure warn- Please note that the TPMS is not a
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 substitute for proper tire maintenance,
& AT OIL TEMP warning seconds to check that the tire pressure and it is the drivers responsibility to
light (AT models) monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning maintain correct tire pressure, even if
properly. If there is no problem and all tires under-inflation has not reached the level
If this light illuminates when the engine is are properly inflated, the light will turn off. to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
running, it may indicate that the automatic Each tire, including the spare (if provided), pressure telltale.
transmission fluid temperature is too hot. should be checked monthly when cold Your vehicle has also been equipped with
If the light illuminates while driving, im- and inflated to the inflation pressure a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place recommended by the vehicle manufac- when the system is not operating properly.
and let the engine idle until the warning turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
light turns off. pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
a different size than the size indicated on When the system detects a malfunction,
! Automatic transmission control the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- the telltale will flash for approximately one
system warning sure label, you should determine the minute and then remain continuously
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it proper tire inflation pressure for those illuminated. This sequence will continue
may indicate that the automatic transmis- tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
sion control system is not working prop- as the malfunction exists. When the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal- malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
has been equipped with a tire pressure
er for service immediately. system may not be able to detect or signal
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
more of your tires is significantly under- malfunctions may occur for a variety of
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire reasons, including the installation of re-
pressure telltale illuminates, you should placement or alternate tires or wheels on
stop and check your tires as soon as the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
possible, and inflate them to the proper functioning properly. Always check the
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
Instruments and controls 3-19

one or more tires or wheels on your the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
to continue to function properly. When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
Should the warning light illuminate stea- wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures
dily after blinking for approximately one original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low
minute, have the system inspected by being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn
possible. steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for
WARNING the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires.
If this light does not illuminate four road wheels. Contact your
briefly after the ignition switch is SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi- or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking CAUTION
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- for approximately one minute,
. If any of the following conditions
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
occur, we recommend that you
soon as possible. to have the system inspected.
have the ABS system repaired at
If this light illuminates while driving, the first available opportunity by
never brake suddenly and keep CAUTION your SUBARU dealer.
driving straight ahead while gradu- The warning light does not
ally reducing speed. Then slowly The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition
pull off the road to a safe place. is NOT a substitute for manually switch is turned to the ON
Otherwise an accident involving checking tire pressure. The tire position.
serious vehicle damage and serious pressure should be checked peri- The warning light illuminates
personal injury could occur. odically (at least monthly) using a when the ignition switch is
If this light still illuminates while tire gauge. After any change to tire turned to the ON position,
driving after adjusting the tire pres- pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- but it does not turn off even
sure, a tire may have significant itoring system will not re-check tire when the vehicle speed ex-
damage and a fast leak that causes inflation pressures until the vehicle ceeds approximately 8 mph
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
CONTINUED
3-20 Instruments and controls

(12 km/h). remains off. ! Parking brake warning


The warning light illuminates When driving with an insufficient battery The light illuminates with the parking
during driving. voltage such as when the engine is jump brake applied while the ignition switch is
. When the warning light is on (and started, the ABS warning light may illumi- in the ON position. It turns off when the
the brake system warning light is nate. This is due to the low battery voltage parking brake is fully released.
off), the ABS function shuts and does not indicate a malfunction. ! Brake fluid level warning
down; however, the conventional When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off. This light illuminates when the brake fluid
brake system continues to oper- level has dropped to near the MIN level
ate normally. of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
& Brake system
switch in the ON position and with the
With a vehicle equipped with an EBD warning light parking brake fully released.
system, the ABS warning light illuminates
together with the brake system warning WARNING If the brake system warning light should
light if the EBD system becomes mal- illuminate while driving (with the parking
functioning. For further details of the EBD . Driving with the brake system brake fully released and with the ignition
system malfunction warning, refer to warning light on is dangerous. switch positioned in ON), it could be an
Brake system warning light F3-20. This indicates your brake system indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
may not be working properly. If brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
NOTE the light remains illuminated, stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
If the warning light behavior is as have the brakes inspected by a and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
described in the following, the ABS SUBARU dealer immediately. level is below the MIN mark in the
system may be considered normal. . If at all in doubt about whether reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
. The warning light illuminates right the brakes are operating prop- the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
after the engine is started but turns off erly, do not drive the vehicle. dealer for repair.
immediately, remaining off. Have your vehicle towed to the
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
. The warning light remains on after nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
(EBD) system warning
the engine has been started, but it pair.
The brake system warning light also
turns off when the vehicle speed
This light has the following three functions. illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
km/h).
together with the ABS warning light.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
Instruments and controls 3-21

the brake system warning light and ABS 6. If the brake fluid level is below the & Hill start assist warning
warning light illuminate simultaneously MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. light (MT models)
during driving. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. While the engine is rotating, if there are
tional braking system will still function. any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
However, the rear wheels will be more & Low fuel warning light system, the light will illuminate.
prone to locking when the brakes are
The low fuel warning light illuminates WARNING
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
when the tank is nearly empty approxi-
cles motion may therefore become some- When the Hill start assist warning
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
what harder to control. light illuminates, have the vehicle
gal). It only operates when the ignition
If the brake system warning light and ABS switch is in the ON position. When this inspected at an authorized SUBARU
warning light illuminate simultaneously, light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi- dealer.
take the following steps. ately.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place. NOTE & Door open warning
2. Shut down the engine, apply the This light does not turn off unless the light
parking brake and then restart it. tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US The door open warning light illuminates if
3. Release the parking brake. If both any door or the rear gate is not fully
warning lights turn off, the EBD system gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
closed.
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the CAUTION Always make sure this light is out before
system inspected. you start to drive.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
and stay illuminated after the engine has ever the low fuel warning light & All-Wheel Drive warn-
been restarted, shut down the engine illuminates. Engine misfires as a ing light (AT models)
again, apply the parking brake, and check result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine. This light illuminates when All-Wheel
the brake fluid level.
Drive is disengaged and the drive me-
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive
MIN mark, the EBD system may be for maintenance or similar purposes.
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
of differing diameters fitted on the wheels
system inspected.
CONTINUED
3-22 Instruments and controls

or with an excessively low air pressure in & Vehicle Dynamics NOTE


any of the tires. Control warning light/ . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Vehicle Dynamics Con- Dynamics Control system itself mal-
CAUTION trol operation indicator functions, only this particular warning
light light illuminates. Under these circum-
Continuing to drive with the AWD stances, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
warning light flashing can damage System) remains fully operational.
the powertrain. If the AWD warning ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning . The warning light illuminates when
light starts to flash, promptly park in light the electronic control system of the
a safe place and check whether the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
tires have differing diameters and CAUTION malfunctions.
whether any of the tires has an
excessively low inflation pressure. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
tem provides its ABS control probably inoperative under any of the
through the electrical circuit of the following conditions. Have your vehicle
& Automatic headlight ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
beam leveler warning is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics ately.
light (models with HID Control system becomes unable to . The warning light does not illuminate
headlights) provide ABS control. As a result, the when the ignition switch is turned to the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system ON position.
This light illuminates when the automatic also becomes inoperative, causing . The warning light illuminates while the
headlight beam leveler does not operate the warning light to illuminate. vehicle is running.
normally. Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
If this light illuminates while driving or does Control and ABS systems are inop- NOTE
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after erative in this case, the ordinary If the warning light behavior is as
turning the ignition switch to the ON functions of the brake system are described in the following examples,
position, have your vehicle inspected at still available. You will be safe while the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
your SUBARU dealer. driving with this condition, but drive may be considered to be operating
carefully and have your vehicle normally.
checked at a SUBARU dealer as . The warning light illuminates right
soon as possible. after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
Instruments and controls 3-23

the engine has started and turns off has warmed up) after the engine has & Security indicator light
while the vehicle is subsequently being started.
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during & Vehicle Dynamics
driving, but it turns off immediately and Control OFF indicator
remains off. light
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- The light illuminates when the Vehicle
tion indicator light Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
The indicator light flashes during activa- to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
tion of the skid suppression function and trol system.
during activation of the traction control The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
function. probably malfunctioning under any of the
NOTE following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- Type A
. The light may remain illuminated for ately.
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold . The light does not illuminate when the
weather. This does not indicate the ignition switch is turned to the ON
existence of a problem. The light position.
should turn off as soon as the engine . The light does not turn off even after a
has warmed up. period of approximately 2 seconds after
. The indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch has been turned to the
the engine has developed a problem ON position.
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator lamp is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
Type B
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after The security indicator light deters potential
the lapse of several minutes (the engine thieves by indicating that the vehicle is

CONTINUED
3-24 Instruments and controls

equipped with an immobilizer system. It In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g., & Select lever and gear posi-
begins flashing in the following ways. an imitation key), the security indicator tion indicator (AT models)
. Once approximately every 3 sec- light illuminates.
onds:
Approximately 60 seconds after the
NOTE
ignition switch is turned from the ON Even if the security indicator light
position to the Acc or LOCK posi- flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
tion (the light does not flash if its fuse is
Immediately after the ignition key is blown), the immobilizer system will
pulled out function normally.

. Twice approximately every 2 sec- & SPORT mode indicator


onds: light (AT models)
After the alarm system has been armed
for surveillance (Refer to Arming the When the select lever is moved to the
system F2-16.) manual gate, the SPORT mode is se-
Type A
lected and the indicator light illuminates.
. Five times approximately every 2 Refer to SPORT mode F7-20.
seconds:
When the alarm system is ready to be
armed.
. Other flashing patterns:
The alarm system may have been trig-
gered by unauthorized intrusion or any
impact to the vehicle body. Refer to
Tripped sensor identification F2-19.
If the security indicator light does not flash,
the immobilizer system may not be func-
tioning properly. If this occurs, contact Type B
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. This indicator shows the position of the
select lever.
Instruments and controls 3-25

When the manual mode is selected, the activate the cruise control function, turn Clock
gear position indicator (which shows the the ignition switch back to the Acc or
current gear selection) and the upshift/ LOCK position, and then turn it again to
downshift indicator light up. Refer to the ON position.
Automatic transmission F7-15.
& Cruise control set in-
& Turn signal indicator dicator light
lights This light illuminates when vehicle speed
These lights show the operation of the turn has been set.
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink & Front fog light indicator
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned light (if equipped)
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
This indicator light is on while the front fog
Refer to Replacing bulbs F11-47.
lights are on.
& High beam indicator The clock shows the time while the
light
& Headlight indicator ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
light position.
This light shows that the headlights are in
This indicator light illuminates when the The time changes by 1 minute each time
the high beam mode.
headlight switch is placed in the or the + button or button is pressed.
This indicator light also illuminates when position.
the headlight flasher is operated. Pressing the + button moves the dis-
played time forward, while pressing the
& Cruise control indica- button moves the displayed time back.
Pressing and holding either button
tor light changes the displayed time continuously.
This light illuminates when the CRUISE
main switch is pressed.
If you press the main switch button while
turning the ignition switch ON, the cruise
control function is deactivated and the
CRUISE indicator light flashes. To re-

CONTINUED
3-26 Instruments and controls

CAUTION Information display For type A combination meter:

To ensure safety, do not attempt to


set the time while driving, as an
accident from inadequate attention
to the road could result.

NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the time
will be erased. After reconnecting the
battery, set the correct time.

1) Information display switching knob


1) Outside temperature indicator
With the ignition switch in the ON
2) Fuel consumption indicator
position, each successive press of the
With the ignition switch in the ON information display switching knob toggles
position, the outside temperature and fuel the display in the following sequence.
consumption are indicated on the display.

For type B combination meter:


The fuel consumption indicator is linked
with the odometer/trip meter display on the
combination meter, according to the fol-
lowing chart.
Instruments and controls 3-27

Odometer/ & Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi-
Trip meter Fuel consumption indicator tor cation
A trip meter Average fuel consumption
corresponding to the A trip
meter
B trip meter Average fuel consumption
corresponding to the B trip
meter
Odometer U.S-spec. models:
Not indicated
Other models:
Current fuel consumption

1) U.S.-spec. models 1) U.S.-spec. models


2) Except U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator shows When the outside temperature drops to
the outside temperature in a range from 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
22 to 1228F (30 to 508C). indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
The indicator can give a false reading If the outside temperature drops to 378F
under any of the following conditions: (38C) or lower while the display is giving
. When there is too much sun. an indication other than the outside
. During idling; while running at low temperature, the display switches to the
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine outside temperature indication and flashes
is restarted immediately following a shut- for 5 seconds before returning to its
down. original indication.
. When the actual outside temperature If the display is already indicating an
falls outside the specified indicator range. outside temperature of 378F (38C) or
lower, the indication does not flash even

CONTINUED
3-28 Instruments and controls

when the outside temperature drops to & Average fuel consumption corresponding to that trip meter indica-
378F (38C) or lower again, unless the tion is not shown until the vehicle has
outside temperature has increased to subsequently covered a distance of 1
418F (58C) or higher. mile (or 1 km).
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
& To turn off fuel consumption
may differ from the actual outside indicator display
temperature. The road surface freeze The fuel consumption indicator display
warning indication should be treated can be turned off.
only as a guide. Be sure to check the To turn off this display, turn the ignition
condition of the road surface before switch to the LOCK position and press
driving. the + button adjacent to the information
display for approximately 5 seconds.
Then, the information display and the
& Current fuel consumption (if 1) U.S.-spec. models
clock display will blink for 3 seconds to
equipped) 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
notify you that the fuel consumption dis-
This indication shows the average rate of play has been turned off.
fuel consumption since the trip meter was To restore the indicator, once again press
last reset. the + button for approximately 5 sec-
When either of the trip meter indications is onds.
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset. NOTE
. The initial display setting of the fuel
NOTE consumption indicator of your vehicle
. The indicated values vary in accor- has been set to operational at the time
dance with changes in the vehicles of shipment from the factory.
running conditions. Also, the indicated . The average fuel consumption is
values may differ slightly from the calculated even while the indicator is
actual values and should thus be not displayed.
This indication shows the rate of fuel treated only as a guide. . Even if you turn off the fuel con-
consumption at the present moment. . When either trip meter indication is sumption indicator, the fuel consump-
reset, the average fuel consumption tion indicator will automatically turn on
Instruments and controls 3-29

when the battery voltage is discon- Light control switch a long time with the light control
nected and then reconnected for bat- switch set to a position other
tery replacement or fuse replacement. The light control switch only operates than OFF, the battery may be
when the ignition key is inserted into the discharged.
ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch.
NOTE
. Even if the key is removed from the
ignition switch, the lights can be illu-
minated by operating the light control
switch position from OFF to
and/or .
. If the drivers door is opened while
the lights are illuminated and the key is
removed from the ignition switch, the
chirp sound informs the driver that the
lights are illuminated.

CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the OFF position. If
the vehicle is left unattended for
CONTINUED
3-30 Instruments and controls

& Headlights & High/low beam change (dim- & Headlight flasher
mer)

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on To flash the headlights, pull the lever
the end of the turn signal lever. To change from low beam to high beam, toward you and then release it. The high
push the turn signal lever forward. When beam will remain on for as long as you
first position hold the lever. The headlight flasher works
the headlights are on high beam, the high
Instrument panel illumination, tail lights, beam indicator light on the combina- even though the light switch is in the
front side marker lights and license plate tion meter is also on. OFF position.
lights are on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever When the headlights are on high beam,
second position back to the detent position. the high beam indicator light on the
Headlights, instrument panel illumination, combination meter also illuminates.
tail lights, front side marker lights, and
license plate lights are on. CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
Instruments and controls 3-31

& Daytime running light system & Automatic headlight beam Turn signal lever
(if equipped) leveler (models with HID
headlights)
WARNING The HID headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
by the daytime running light system. may experience too much glare when your
The light switch must always be headlight beam height adjustment is high
turned to the position when it due to the vehicle carrying heavy load.
is dark outside. The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
The high beam headlights will automati- matically and optimally according to the
cally illuminate at reduced brightness load being carried by the vehicle.
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions: To activate the right turn signal, push the
. The select lever is in a position other turn signal lever up. To activate the left
than the P position (AT models). turn signal, push the turn signal lever
. The parking brake is fully released. down. When the turn is finished, the lever
. The light switch is in the OFF or will return automatically. If the lever does
position. not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
NOTE To signal a lane change, push the turn
When the light switch is in the signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
position, the front side marker lights, during the lane change. The turn signal
tail lights and license plate lights are indicator lights will flash in the direction of
also illuminated. the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
3-32 Instruments and controls

Illumination brightness con- at all. Front fog light switch (if


trol equipped)

The brightness of clock display, audio, air The front fog lights operate only when the
conditioner, information display and instru- low beam headlights are illuminated.
ment panel illumination dims when the However, the front fog lights turn off when
light switch is in the or the headlights are switched to high beam.
positions. You can adjust brightness of To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front
the instrument panel illumination for better fog light switch on the turn signal lever
visibility. upward to the position. To turn off the
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. front fog lights, turn the switch back down
To darken, turn the control dial downward. to the OFF position.

NOTE
When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
Instruments and controls 3-33

Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that


the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
WARNING before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the
windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the wiper blades to be
defroster. damaged but also the wiper mo-
Otherwise the washer fluid can tor to burn out. If the wiper
freeze on the windshield, blocking blades are frozen to the window
your view. glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
Type A cer (if equipped) or rear window
CAUTION defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec- . If the wipers stop during opera-
onds, or when the washer fluid tion because of ice or some other
tank is empty. This may cause obstruction on the window, the
overheating of the washer motor. wiper motor could burn out even
Check the washer fluid level if the wiper switch is turned off. If
frequently, such as at fuel stops. this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
. Do not operate the wipers when ignition switch to the LOCK
the windshield or rear window is position and clean the window
dry. This may scratch the glass, glass to allow proper wiper op-
damage the wiper blades and eration.
Type B cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper . Use clean water if windshield
The indicator light located on the combi- washer fluid is unavailable. In
nation meter will illuminate when the front on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the wind- areas where water freezes in
fog lights are on. winter, use SUBARU Windshield
shield washer.
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
CONTINUED
3-34 Instruments and controls

Refer to Windshield washer road film. Keep the washer button & Windshield wiper and washer
fluid F11-38. depressed at least for 1 second so that switches
Also, when driving the vehicle washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window. The wiper operates only when the ignition
when there are freezing tempera- switch is in the ON or Acc position.
tures, use non-freezing type wi- . Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
per blades. rial on the windshield or the wiper ! Windshield wipers
blade results in jerky wiper operation
. Do not clean the wiper blades and streaking on the glass. If you
with gasoline or a solvent, such cannot remove those streaks after
as paint thinner or benzine. This operating the washer or if the wiper
will cause deterioration of the operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
wiper blades. face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
NOTE soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
. The wiper operates only when the rinse the window glass and wiper
ignition switch is in the ON or Acc blades with clean water. The glass is
position. clean if no beads form on the glass
. The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water.
against overloads by a circuit breaker. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
If the motor operates continuously OFF: Off
even after following this procedure, : Intermittent
under an unusually heavy load, the replace the wiper blades with new LO: Low speed
circuit breaker may trip to stop the ones. For replacement instructions, HI: High speed
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to Replacement of wiper blades
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the F11-40. To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
wiper switch, and wait for approxi- control lever down.
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
will reset itself, and the wipers will the OFF position.
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
Instruments and controls 3-35

! Wiper intermittent time control ! Mist (for a single wipe) ! Washer

When the wiper switch is in the For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the To wash the windshield, push the washer
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- lever toward you. The wipers operate until button at the end of the wiper control lever.
ing interval of the wiper. you release the lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release
the washer button. The wipers operate
The operating interval can be adjusted while you push the button.
continuously from the shortest interval to
the longest.
The operating interval can be adjusted in
nine steps.

CONTINUED
3-36 Instruments and controls

& Rear window wiper and speed is high). Mirrors


washer switch When the transmission is shifted into
reverse, the rear wiper will switch to Always check that the inside and outside
continuous operation. When the transmis- mirrors are properly adjusted before you
sion is shifted to a position other than start driving.
reverse, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation. & Inside mirror
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob clockwise
to the position. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob counter-
clockwise to the position. The washer
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
fluid sprays, and 2 seconds later the rear
ON: Continuous
wiper operates. Releasing the knob stops
INT: Intermittent
OFF: Off
the washer fluid spray, and 3 seconds
: Washer later the rear wiper stops.
The inside mirror has a day and night
! Rear wiper
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on mirror toward you for the night position.
the end of the wiper control lever upward Push it away for the day position. The
to the INT or ON position. night position reduces glare from head-
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on lights.
the end of the lever to the OFF position.
With the switch turned to the INT
position, the rear wiper will operate inter-
mittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle
speed is low; shorter when the vehicle
Instruments and controls 3-37

& Auto-dimming mirror/com- button, the compass display is toggled on other similar items. Periodically wipe the
pass (if equipped) or off. When the compass is on, an sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
illuminated compass reading will appear cotton cloth or an applicator.
in the upper right corner of the mirror. ! Compass zone adjustment
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
! Photosensors

1) Auto dimming indicator


2) Left (mirror) button
3) Photosensor Compass calibration zones
4) Right (compass) button
5) Compass display 1. The zone setting is factory preset to
Zone 8. Refer to the Compass calibration
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare zones map shown above to verify that the
feature which automatically reduces glare compass zone setting is correct for your
coming from headlights of vehicles behind geographical location.
you. It also contains a built-in compass. 2. Press and hold the right button for 3
. By pressing and releasing the left The mirror has a photosensor attached on
seconds then release, and the word
button, the automatic dimming function is both the front and back sides. If the glare
ZONE will briefly appear and then the
toggled on or off. When the automatic from the headlights of vehicles behind you
zone number will be displayed.
dimming function is on, the auto dimming strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it
and make the reflection surface of the 3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
indicator light (green) located on the left to cycle the display through all possible
button will illuminate. mirror dimmer to help prevent you from
being blinded. For this reason, use care zone settings. Stop cycling when the
. By pressing and releasing the right correct zone setting for your location is
not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
CONTINUED
3-38 Instruments and controls

displayed. & Auto-dimming mirror/com- dimming function is on, the LED indicator
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will pass with HomeLink (if will illuminate.
exit the zone setting mode. equipped) Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
! Compass calibration bright if the transmission is shifted into
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
nonessential electrical accessories (rear visibility during reversing.
window defogger, heater/air conditioning . By pressing the compass display but-
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all ton, the compass display is toggled on or
doors are shut. off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
2. Drive to an open, level area away from nated compass reading will appear in the
large metallic objects or structures and upper right corner of the mirror.
make certain the ignition switch is in the When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
ON position. towel or similar material dampened with
3. Press and hold the right button for 6 - 7 glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
seconds then release, and the compass directly on the mirror as that may cause
will enter the calibration mode. CAL and 1) HomeLink button 1 the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
direction will be displayed. 2) HomeLink button 2 housing and damage the mirror.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until CAL 3) LED
disappears from the display (approxi- 4) HomeLink button 3
mately two to three circles). The compass 5) Sensor
is now calibrated. 6) Automatic dimming on/off button
7) Compass display button
5. Further calibration may be necessary
8) Compass display
should outside influences cause the mirror
to read inaccurately. You will know that The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
this has occurred if your compass begins feature which automatically reduces glare
to read in only limited directions. Should coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you encounter this situation, return to step you. It also contains a built-in compass
one of the above procedure and recali- and HomeLink wireless control system.
brate the mirror. . By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
Instruments and controls 3-39

! Photosensors ! Compass zone adjustment ! Compass calibration


1. If a C is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the compass display button for 9
Compass calibration zones seconds until a C appears in the
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
compass window.
both the front and back sides. During 1. Refer to the Compass calibration
nighttime driving, these sensors detect 5. Calibrate the compass according to
zones map shown above to verify that step 2 or step 3.
distracting glare from vehicle headlights the compass zone setting is correct for
behind you and automatically dim the your geographical location.
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve ! HomeLink Wireless Control Sys-
2. Press and hold the compass display tem
your vision. For this reason, use care not button for 3 seconds until the zone
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other The HomeLink Wireless Control System
selection comes up (a number will be
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen- can be used to activate remote control
displayed in the mirror compass window).
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton devices such as gate operators, garage
3. Press the compass display button door openers, door locks, home lighting
cloth or an applicator.
repeatedly until the correct zone setting and security systems.
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will There are three HomeLink buttons on the
exit the zone setting mode. mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink website at:
CONTINUED
3-40 Instruments and controls

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- and objects are out of the way of NOTE
3515. the garage door or other device . After programming your HomeLink
to prevent potential harm or Wireless Control System for the de-
Note the following information about this
damage. sired devices, retain the hand-held
system.
. Do not use the HomeLink Wire- transmitters for further programming
If your vehicle is equipped with the or device testing in the event of a
HomeLink Wireless Control System, it less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the problem.
complies with Part 15 of the Federal . It is recommended that you insert a
Communications Commission Rules in safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety new battery in the hand-held transmit-
the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry ter of a device to ensure correct
Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object, programming.
to the following two conditions:
signaling the door to stop and
(1) this device may not cause harmful ! Garage door opener programming in
reverse, does not meet these
interference, and (2) this device must the U.S.A.
safety standards. Using a garage
accept any interference received, includ-
door opener without these fea-
ing interference that may cause undesired
tures increases risk of serious NOTE
operation. When programming the HomeLink
injury or death. For more infor-
Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink Wireless Control System for a garage
by anyone other than an authorized website at www.homelink.com or door opener, it is suggested that you
service facility could void authorization to call 1-800-355-3515. park the vehicle outside the garage.
use this equipment. 1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are opener from the outlet.
CAUTION
registered trademarks of Johnson Con- NOTE
trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink
If any of the HomeLink buttons are
Wireless Control System to operate
WARNING already programmed for other devices,
a garage door opener or an entrance
skip step 2 because it clears the
gate, unplug the devices motor
. When programming the memory of all three buttons.
from the outlet during programming
HomeLink Wireless Control Sys- to prevent motor burnout.
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
Instruments and controls 3-41
NOTE ! Programming rolling-code-protected
Some gate operators and garage door garage door openers in the U.S.A.
openers may require you to replace If your garage door opener has a rolling
this programming step 4 with proce- code feature, program the HomeLink
dures in Programming for entrance Wireless Control System for it by following
gates and garage door openers in steps 1 through 5 in Garage door opener
Canada F3-42. programming in the U.S.A. F3-40. Then
5. Hold down both buttons until the continue with the following steps.
HomeLink indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator NOTE
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be The assistance of a second person
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi- may make the programming quicker
cates successful programming of the new and easier.
1) HomeLink button 1
2) HomeLink button 2 frequency signal.)
3) HomeLink button 3 6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink indicator
2. Press and hold the two outer light. If the indicator light stays on con-
HomeLink buttons (button 1 and button tinuously, your garage door should acti-
3) until the indicator light begins to flash vate and the programming is completed.
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
3. Hold the end of the garage door seconds and then stays on continuously,
openers hand-held transmitter between your garage door opener may be pro-
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from tected by a rolling code feature. In this
the HomeLink button you wish to pro- case you need to perform the additional
gram. steps that are described in Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
4. Simultaneously press and hold both 1. Locate the training button on the
ers in the U.S.A. F3-41.
the hand-held transmitter button and the garage door opener motor head unit.
desired HomeLink button. DO NOT re- The exact location and color of the button
lease the buttons until step 5 has been may vary by brand of garage door opener.
completed. If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door openers instruc-
CONTINUED
3-42 Instruments and controls

tion manual. NOTE


Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above press-hold-
release sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed.

! Programming for entrance gates and


garage door openers in Canada 1) HomeLink button 1
1) Training button 1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate 2) HomeLink button 2
or garage door opener from the outlet. 3) HomeLink button 3
2. Press the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit NOTE 2. Press and hold the two outer
(which activates the training light on the HomeLink buttons (button 1 and button
If any of the HomeLink buttons are
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds. 3) until the HomeLink indicator light
already programmed for other devices,
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for begins to flash (after approximately 20
skip step 2 because it clears the
2 seconds and release the HomeLink seconds). Then release both buttons.
memory of all three buttons.
button that was programmed in the pre- 3. Hold the end of the entrance gates/
vious section. Press and release the garage door openers hand-held transmit-
button a second time to complete the ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
programming procedure. mm) away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button.
5. Press and release (cycle) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
Instruments and controls 3-43

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly begins to flash slowly (after approximately
and then rapidly after several seconds, 20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
release both buttons. mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ (25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
garage door opener to the outlet. button you wish to program.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
opener by pressing the programmed mitter button. The HomeLink indicator
HomeLink button. light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
! Operating the HomeLink Wireless rapidly, release both buttons.
Control System
The programming for the previous device
Once programmed, the HomeLink Wire- is now erased and the new device can be
less Control System can be used to operated by pressing the HomeLink 1) HomeLink button 1
remote-control the devices to which its button. 2) HomeLink button 2
buttons are programmed. To activate a 3) HomeLink button 3
device, simply press the appropriate but- ! Erasing HomeLink button memory
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat- 1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
ing that the signal is being transmitted. NOTE (button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
. Performing this procedure erases light begins to flash (after approximately
! Programming other devices 20 seconds).
the memory of all the preprogrammed
To program other devices such as door buttons simultaneously. The memory 2. Release both buttons.
locks, home lighting and security systems, of individual buttons cannot be erased.
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com . It is recommended that upon the ! In case a problem occurs
or call 1-800-355-3515. sale of the vehicle, the memory of all If you cannot activate a device using the
! Reprogramming a single HomeLink programmed HomeLink buttons be corresponding HomeLink button after
button erased for security purposes. programming, contact HomeLink at
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release 3515 for assistance.
the button until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2. When the HomeLink indicator light
CONTINUED
3-44 Instruments and controls

& Outside mirrors when the ignition switch is in the ON or push the switch again.
Acc position.
1. Press either end of the selection NOTE
switch, L for the left, R for the right. . When the temperature is low, the
2. Move the direction control switch in the outside mirrors may stop during opera-
direction you want to move the mirror. tion. Push the switch again. When the
outside mirrors do not work by switch
3. Return the selection switch to the
operation, move them several times by
neutral position to prevent unintentional
manually. This makes it possible to
operation.
operate them by switch operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- . When you operate the power folding
ally. mirror switch continuously, it may not
work. This is not a malfunction. Oper-
! Power folding mirror switch (if
ate after waiting for a short period of
equipped)
time.
! Remote control mirror switch . When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.

The power folding mirror switch operates


1) Selection switch only when the ignition switch is in the ON
2) Direction control switch or Acc position.
To fold the outside mirrors, push the power
The remote control mirrors operate only folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,
Instruments and controls 3-45

Defogger and deicer window defogger. For some models, the


outside mirror defogger and/or windshield
wiper deicer are/is also equipped. The
defogger and deicer system is activated
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

Automatic climate control system (type A)

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system (type B)


1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
To activate the defogger and deicer
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) system, push the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The
The vehicle is equipped with a rear rear window defogger, outside mirror

CONTINUED
3-46 Instruments and controls

defogger and windshield wiper deicer are The settings can also be changed by a . While the defogger and deicer sys-
activated simultaneously. The indicator SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU tem is in the continuous operation
light on the control switch illuminates while dealer for details. mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
the defogger and deicer system is acti- . Models without genuine SUBARU 9 mph (15 km/h) or less for 15 minutes,
vated. navigation system: the windshield wiper deicer automati-
The settings can be changed by a cally stops operating, though the rear
To turn them off, push the control switch window defogger and outside mirror
again. They also turn off when the ignition SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. defogger maintain continuous opera-
switch is turned to the Acc or LOCK tion in this condition.
position. . While the defogger and deicer sys-
CAUTION
The defogger and deicer system will tem is in the continuous operation
automatically shut off after approximately . To prevent the battery from being mode, if the battery voltage drops
15 minutes. If the rear window and the discharged, do not operate the below the permissible level, continu-
outside mirrors have been cleared and the defogger and deicer system con- ous operation of the defogger and
windshield wiper blades have been deiced tinuously for any longer than deicer system is canceled and the
completely before that time, push the necessary. system stops operating.
control switch to turn them off. If defrost- . Do not use sharp instruments or
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete, window cleaner containing abra-
you have to push the control switch to turn sives to clean the inner surface
them on again. of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
For models with the automatic climate
on the window.
control system, it is possible to set the
defogger and deicer system for the con-
tinuous operation mode as follows. NOTE
. Models with genuine SUBARU navi- . Turn on the defogger and deicer
gation system: system if the wipers are frozen to the
The settings can be changed for the windshield.
continuous operation mode using the . If the windshield is covered with
navigation monitor. For details, refer to snow, remove the snow so that the
the Owners Manual supplement for the windshield wiper deicer works effec-
navigation system. tively.
Instruments and controls 3-47

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel Horn

WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dan-
gerous to drive without locking 1) Tilt adjustment
the steering wheel. This may 2) Telescopic adjustment (if equipped)
cause loss of vehicle control To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
and result in personal injury.
Front seats F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.

Climate control

Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2 Operating tips for heater and air


Airflow selection ................................................. 4-2 conditioner ...................................................... 4-17
Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-3 Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-17
Manual climate control system (if Efficient cooling after parking in direct
equipped) .......................................................... 4-3 sunlight ........................................................... 4-17
Control panel ...................................................... 4-3 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Heater operation ................................................. 4-5 circuit.............................................................. 4-18 4
Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-7 Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-18
Automatic climate control system (if Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
equipped) .......................................................... 4-8 low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-18
Type A ................................................................ 4-8 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
Type B ............................................................... 4-13 is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-18
Temperature sensors.......................................... 4-17 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-18
Air filtration system ........................................... 4-18
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-19
4-2 Climate control

Ventilator
& Airflow selection
Climate control 4-3

& Center and side ventilators ! Side ventilators Manual climate control sys-
! Center ventilators tem (if equipped)
& Control panel

1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. 3) Thumb-wheel
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. 1) Temperature control dial
To open or close the ventilator, turn the 2) Fan speed control dial
thumb-wheel up or down. 3) Airflow control dial
4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer
system (Refer to Defogger and deicer
F3-45.)
5) Air conditioner button
6) Air inlet selection button
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets over a range
from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm).

CONTINUED
4-4 Climate control

! Fan speed control dial less of the position of the air condi- conditioner. The indicator light will illumi-
The fan operates only when the ignition tioner button to defog the windshield nate.
switch is turned to the ON position. The more quickly. However the indicator on
the air conditioner button will not Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
fan speed control dial is used to select
four fan speeds. illuminate. At the same time, the air ! Air inlet selection button
inlet selection is automatically set to
! Airflow control dial outside air mode.
The dial has five positions that activate the In this state, you cannot select recir-
following air outlets. culation mode by manually pressing
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets the air inlet selection button.
Also, you cannot stop the air condi-
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and tioner compressor by pressing the air
foot outlets conditioner button.
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of ! Air conditioner button
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster out- is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of air inlet selection button to the ON posi-
the instrument panel tion. The indicator light will illuminate.
Place the air inlet selection button to the
: Windshield defroster outlets and both
ON position for fast cooling with the air
side outlets of the instrument panel
conditioner or when driving on a dusty
For details, refer to Airflow selection F4- road.
2.
OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is
NOTE The air conditioner operates only when drawn into the passenger compartment.
When the dial is placed in the or the engine is running. Push the air inlet selection button again to
position, the air conditioner com- the OFF position. The indicator light will
Push the air conditioner button while the turn off.
pressor operates automatically regard-
fan is in operation to turn on the air
Climate control 4-5

Place the air inlet selection button to the corresponding thumb wheel down. ! Heating and defrosting
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road ! Defrosting or defogging the wind-
is no longer dusty. shield

WARNING
Continued operation with the air
inlet selection button in the ON
position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the OFF position as soon
as the outside dusty condition
clears.

& Heater operation To direct warm air toward the floor and the
windshield:
NOTE 1. Set the airflow control dial to the
. Models with air conditioner system: To direct warm air to the windshield and
position.
When the or position is front door windows:
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
selected, the air conditioner compres- 1. Set the airflow control dial to the
most comfortable level.
sor automatically operates regardless position.
3. Set the fan speed control dial to the
of the position of the air conditioner 2. Turn the temperature control dial all
desired speed.
button to defog the windshield more the way to the right.
quickly. At the same time, the air inlet 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the
selection is automatically switched to highest speed.
the OFF position (outside air). How-
ever, the air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate at this time.
. When defrosting, defogging or heat-
ing, warm air is also emitted from the
right and left air outlets. To stop warm
airflow from these outlets, turn the

CONTINUED
4-6 Climate control

! Heating ! Bi-level heating outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
! Ventilation

To direct warm air toward the floor: This setting allows you to direct air of
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the different temperatures from the instrument To force outside air through the instrument
OFF position. panel and foot outlets. The air from the panel outlets:
2. Set the airflow control dial to the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
position. the instrument panel outlets. OFF position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 2. Set the airflow control dial to the
most comfortable level. OFF position. position.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 2. Set the airflow control dial to the 3. Set the temperature control dial all the
desired speed. position. way left.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired temperature level. desired speed.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed. When driving on a dusty road, set the air
inlet selection button to the ON position.
Setting the temperature control dial fully
turned to the red area or blue area
decreases the temperature difference
between the air from the instrument panel
Climate control 4-7

WARNING OFF position. highest speed.


2. Set the airflow control dial to the
The air conditioner compressor automati-
Continued operation with the air position.
cally operates when the airflow control dial
inlet selection button in the ON 3. Set the air conditioner button to the is set in the or position to provide
position may fog up the windows. ON position. better defogging performance.
Switch to the OFF position as soon 4. Set the temperature control dial to the
as the outside dusty condition blue side.
clears. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
& Air conditioner operation
! Defrosting or defogging
! Cooling or dehumidifying

To direct warm air to the windshield and


1) ON position front door windows:
For cooling and dehumidification of the 1. Set the airflow control dial to the
passenger compartment, performing the position.
following steps will allow air to flow 2. Set the temperature control dial to the
through the instrument panel outlets: red side.
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
4-8 Climate control

Automatic climate control defroster button while the automatic cli-


mate control system is deactivated, only
system (if equipped) the defroster function will be activated.

NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature
turns on the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically and the A/C indi-
cator light on the control panel illumi-
nates.

& Type A
NOTE
The blower fan rotates at a low speed
when the engine coolant temperature is
low. For efficient defogging or dehumi-
difying in cold weather, press the A/C
button.
The automatic climate control system
automatically controls outlet air tempera-
ture, fan speed, airflow distribution air-inlet
control, and air conditioner compressor
operation. It activates when the fan speed
control button or the AUTO button is
pressed, and is used to maintain a
constant, comfortable climate within the
passenger compartment. If you press the
Climate control 4-9

! Control panel 1) Temperature control dial (drivers side)


2) AUTO button
3) DUAL mode button
4) OFF button
5) Air inlet selection button
6) Fan speed control button
7) Airflow mode selection button
8) Air conditioner button
9) Temperature control dial (front passen-
gers side)
10) Defroster button
11) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
Defogger and deicer F3-45.)

CONTINUED
4-10 Climate control

! AUTO button operated. To change the system back to ! Temperature control dial
FULL AUTO mode operation: the FULL AUTO mode, press the AUTO
button.
! OFF button

To increase the temperature setting, turn


When the AUTO button is pressed, the the temperature control dial clockwise. To
indicator light FULL AUTO on the display decrease the temperature setting, turn the
illuminates. In this state, fan speed, airflow The automatic climate control system dial counterclockwise.
distribution, air-inlet control, and air con- turns off (the air conditioner compressor Each temperature setting is shown on the
ditioner compressor operation are auto- and fan turn off) when the OFF button is display.
matically controlled. pressed.
AUTO mode operation: When the OFF button is pressed, the
outside air mode (air inlet selection OFF)
If you operate any of the buttons on the
is automatically selected.
control panel other than the OFF button,
rear window defogger button and tem-
perature control dials during FULL AUTO
mode operation, the indicator light FULL
on the control panel will turn off and the
indicator light AUTO will remain illumi-
nated. You can then manually control the
system as desired using the button you
Climate control 4-11

! DUAL mode ! Defroster button pressing the OFF button.


Alternatively, press the button again
to return the system to the setting that was
selected before you activated the defros-
ter.
! Fan speed control button

It is possible to make separate tempera- To defrost or dehumidify the windshield


ture settings for the drivers side and and front door windows, press the defros-
passengers side (DUAL mode). ter button . When the button is
pressed, the indicator light on the button
To activate the DUAL mode: illuminates and the following operation is
Press the DUAL button. When the DUAL performed.
mode is activated, the indicator light on The fan speed control button has 7
. The outside air is drawn into the different fan speed positions.
the DUAL button illuminates. passenger compartment and the airflow
To deactivate the DUAL mode: The fan speed is shown by the display.
is directed towards the windshield and the
Press the DUAL button again. When the front door windows.
DUAL mode is deactivated, the indicator . The air conditioner compressor auto-
light on the DUAL button turns off and matically operates to quickly defog the
the temperature setting for the front windshield.
passengers side becomes the same as
the setting for the drivers side. After eliminating the fogging from the
windshield, return the climate control
system to the FULL AUTO mode by
pressing the AUTO button or turn off by

CONTINUED
4-12 Climate control

! A/C Air conditioner button ! Airflow mode selection button lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of
the instrument panel
NOTE
When the mode is selected, the air
conditioner compressor automatically
operates to more quickly defog the
windshield. At the same time, the air
inlet selection is automatically set to
the mode (outside air mode).

If the windshield starts to fog when the Select the desired airflow mode by press-
climate control system is operated in the ing the airflow mode selection button. The
AUTO mode, press the air conditioner selected airflow mode is indicated on the
button A/C to defog and dehumidify. display.
When this button is pressed, the air There are four airflow modes that activate
conditioner compressor turns on and the the following air outlets.
indicator light A/C on the display illumi-
nates. To turn off the air conditioner (Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
compressor, press the A/C button again.
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
NOTE the foot outlets
The air conditioner compressor does (Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
not operate when the outside air tem- the instrument panel and some through
perature is below 328F (08C). windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster out-
Climate control 4-13

! Air inlet selection button turned fully counterclockwise, the recircu- & Type B
lation mode is automatically selected.) Although this climate control system can
When the outside air mode is selected, a be used as a full-automatic climate control
indicator light appears on the dis- system, it can also, if desired, be used as
play. a semi-automatic climate control system.
WARNING When it is used as a full-automatic climate
control system, the outlet air temperature,
Continued operation in the fan speed, airflow distribution, air inlet
position may fog up the windows. control, and air conditioner compressor
Switch to the position as soon operation are all automatically controlled
as the outside dusty condition to maintain a constant, comfortable tem-
clears. perature inside the vehicle.
NOTE
Select airflow by pressing the air inlet NOTE . When the engine coolant is cold, the
selection button. When driving on a dusty road or behind blower does not run.
The selected air inlet setting is shown on a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust . In the AUTO mode, when the air
the control panel. gases, set the air inlet selection button temperature in the passenger compart-
(Recirculation): Interior air recircu- to the position. From time to ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi-
lates inside the passenger compartment. time, return the air inlet selection tioner compressor does not operate.
Use this position when quickly cooling button to the position to draw For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
down the passenger compartment or to outside air into the passenger compart- ing in cold weather, press the A/C
prevent outside air from entering the ment. button to operate the air conditioner
passenger compartment. When the recir- compressor.
culation mode is selected, a indica-
tor light appears on the display.
(Outside air): Outside air is drawn
into the passenger compartment. When
the climate control system is operated in
the AUTO mode, this position is selected
automatically. (There is one exception:
When the temperature control dial is
CONTINUED
4-14 Climate control

! Control panel . Airflow control dial: AUTO position and their functions are as follows.
. Fan speed control dial: AUTO position OFF: The fan does not operate.
! To use as semi-automatic climate AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted auto-
control system matically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the pas-
Each function can be individually set to
senger compartment, the intensity of sun-
AUTO mode independently of the others.
light, and other factors. SUBARU recom-
Any function set to AUTO mode is con-
mends using the AUTO position.
trolled automatically. Any function not set
to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted Other positions: The fan speed can be
as desired. adjusted in 7 steps.
The temperature can be set within a range NOTE
of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C). With the fan speed control dial in the
! Fan speed control dial AUTO position and the airflow control
1) Temperature control dial dial in the , , or position,
2) Fan speed control dial the fan does not operate during engine
3) Airflow control dial warm-up until the engine coolant tem-
4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer perature exceeds approximately 1228F
system (Refer to Defogger and deicer (508C).
F3-45.)
5) Air inlet selection button
6) Air conditioner button
! To use as full-automatic climate
control system
1. Place the temperature control dial in
the position for the preferred temperature.
2. Set the airflow control dial and fan
The fan operates only with the ignition
speed control dial in the AUTO position.
switch in the ON position. The fan speed
The systems functions will then switch to control dial is used to select the AUTO
AUTO mode and be controlled automati- (automatic control) mode or to select the
cally. desired fan speed. The dials positions
Climate control 4-15

! Temperature control dial ! Airflow control dial (Heat-def): Windshield defroster out-
lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of
the instrument panel
: Windshield defroster outlets and both
side outlets of the instrument panel
For details, refer to Airflow selection F4-
2.
NOTE
When the dial is placed in the or
position, the air inlet selection is
automatically set to outside air
mode.
This dial is used to set the desired interior The dial has six positions that activate the ! Air inlet selection button
temperature. With the dial set to your following outlets.
desired temperature, the system automa- AUTO: The airflow control is adjusted
tically adjusts the temperature of air automatically in accordance with the air
supplied from the outlets such that the temperature inside and outside the pas-
desired temperature is achieved and senger compartment, the intensity of sun-
maintained. light, and other factors. SUBARU recom-
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, mends using the AUTO position.
the system gives maximum cooling per-
formance. If the dial is turned fully clock- (Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
wise, the system gives maximum heating (Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
performance. foot outlets
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and ON position (Recirculation): Interior air
both side windows to prevent fogging.) is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
air inlet selection button to the ON position

CONTINUED
4-16 Climate control

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or ! Air conditioner button mode. To return to AUTO mode, turn the
when driving on a dusty road. The fan speed control dial or airflow control
indicator light will illuminate. dial to a position other than the AUTO
OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air position. Then turn to AUTO mode.
is drawn into the passenger compartment. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO
Push the air inlet selection button to the position.
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road NOTE
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will The air conditioners compressor does
turn off. not operate with an outside tempera-
AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and ture of 328F (08C) or lower.
airflow control dial to the AUTO position.
The air inlet control is then adjusted
automatically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the pas- The button positions and their functions
senger compartment, the intensity of sun- are as follows.
light, and other factors. Pressing the air ON: The air conditioner operates while the
inlet selection button cancels the AUTO fan is running.
mode. To return to AUTO mode, turn the Push the button to select this position. The
fan speed control dial or airflow control indicator light will illuminate.
dial to a position other than the AUTO OFF: The air conditioner does not oper-
position. Then turn to AUTO mode. ate.
SUBARU recommends using the AUTO Push the button again to select this
position. position. The indicator light will turn off.
AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and
WARNING airflow control dial to the AUTO position.
Continued operation in the ON posi- The air conditioner compressor operation
tion may fog up the windows. Switch is then adjusted automatically in accor-
to the OFF position as soon as the dance with the air temperature inside and
outside dusty condition clears. outside the passenger compartment, the
intensity of sunlight, and other factors.
Pressing the button cancels the AUTO
Climate control 4-17

& Temperature sensors properly and become damaged, the sys- Operating tips for heater and
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
air conditioner
the sensors, observe the following pre- & Cleaning ventilation grille
cautions.
Do not subject the sensors to impact.
Keep water away from the sensors.
Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows.
Solar sensor: beside the windshield
defroster grille.
Interior air temperature sensor: near
the ignition switch.
Outside temperature sensor: behind
the front grille.

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille


free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.

1) Interior air temperature sensor & Efficient cooling after parking


2) Solar sensor in direct sunlight
The automatic climate control system After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
employs several sensors. These sensors the windows open for a few minutes to
are delicate. If they are not treated allow outside air to circulate into the

CONTINUED
4-18 Climate control

heated interior. This results in quicker system. Air filtration system


cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor Replace the filter element according to the
the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is replacement schedule as follows. This
efficiency. heavily loaded schedule should be followed to maintain
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the filters dust collection ability. Under
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed extremely dusty conditions, the filter
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi- should be replaced more frequently. It is
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator recommended that you have your filter
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid checked or replaced by your SUBARU
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep dealer. For replacement, use only a
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade. genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:
& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
system before summer sea- control system km) whichever comes first
son Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper od of adding, changing or checking the CAUTION
operation each spring. Have the air con- refrigerant is different from the method for
ditioning system checked by your CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
SUBARU dealer. dealer for service. Repairs needed as a following occurs, even if it is not yet
result of using the wrong refrigerant are time to change the filter.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in not covered under warranty. Reduction of the airflow through
high humidity and low tem- the vents.
perature weather conditions Windshield gets easily fogged or
Under certain weather conditions (high misted.
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This NOTE
condition is normal and does not indicate The filter can influence the air condi-
any problem with the air conditioning tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
Climate control 4-19

mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing an air filter


1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.

(3) Pull out the glove box. 3. Replace the air filter element with a
new one.

CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the point UP.
glove box.

2. Remove the air filter.

CONTINUED
4-20 Climate control

air filter as shown in the illustration.

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect 1) Service label


the damper shaft. (2) Attach the service label to the
5. Close the glove box. drivers side door pillar.
6. LABEL installation
(1) Fill out the information on the
service label (small).

1) Caution label
(3) Attach the caution label next to the
Audio

Antenna system .................................................. 5-3 CD player operation .......................................... 5-22


Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-3 Play file ............................................................. 5-23
FM reception ....................................................... 5-3 How to insert a CD (type A, C and D) ................. 5-23
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4 How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-23
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4 How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-24
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 To select a track from its beginning.................... 5-25
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-25
Type C audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-7 Repeating .......................................................... 5-26
Type D audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-8 Random playback .............................................. 5-26 5
Power and audio controls .................................. 5-9 Scan (type A, B and C audio) ............................. 5-27
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-9 Display selection (type A, B and C audio) ........... 5-28
Sound controls and audio settings ...................... 5-9 Folder selection ................................................. 5-28
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-13 How to eject a CD from the player (type A, C and D
audio).............................................................. 5-29
FM/AM selection................................................. 5-13
How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-29
Tuning ............................................................... 5-13
When the following messages are displayed....... 5-29
HD RadioTM Technology (Digital AM and FM
Radio) (type D audio)........................................ 5-15 Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)...................... 5-30
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and Precautions to observe when handling a
RT (Radio Text) ................................................ 5-16 compact disc................................................... 5-31
Station preset .................................................... 5-17 USB storage device / iPod operations
Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-18 (type C and D audio) ...................................... 5-33
XMTM satellite radio (U.S.A. only) ........................ 5-18 Play file ............................................................. 5-33
Sirius satellite radio ........................................... 5-18 Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-33
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-18 Connectable iPod models................................. 5-33
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-19 Connecting USB storage device / iPod ............. 5-34
Band selection ................................................... 5-20 How to play back ............................................... 5-35
Channel and category selection .......................... 5-20 To select a track/index from its beginning .......... 5-35
Channel preset................................................... 5-21 To select a chapter from its beginning when
Display selection (type A, B and C audio) ........... 5-22 connecting iPod ............................................. 5-35
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-35
Repeating .......................................................... 5-36
Audio

Random playback .............................................. 5-36 MUTE button


SCAN (only when connecting USB storage (models without Hands-free system)................. 5-41
device)............................................................. 5-37 Bluetooth audio (type C and D audio)............ 5-41
Selecting category Media format ..................................................... 5-41
(only when connecting iPod)........................... 5-37 Setting Bluetooth audio.................................... 5-41
Display selection................................................ 5-37 Bluetooth audio operation ................................ 5-42
Folder selection (only when connecting USB Hands-free system (if equipped) ...................... 5-43
storage device) ................................................ 5-37
Tips for the Hands-free system .......................... 5-43
Setting the playing speed (only when the
audiobook is playing) (type D audio)................. 5-37 Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-44
When the following messages are displayed ....... 5-38 Safety precautions ............................................. 5-45
Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-46
Audio control buttons (if equipped).................. 5-38
Bluetooth setting ............................................. 5-54
MODE button ..................................................... 5-38
and buttons ......................................... 5-39 Screensaver (type D audio) .............................. 5-56
Volume control buttons ...................................... 5-40 Downloading picture .......................................... 5-56
Selecting picture................................................ 5-56
Erasing picture .................................................. 5-57
Audio 5-3

Antenna system & FM reception


Although FM is normally static free,
& Roof antenna reception can be affected by the surround-
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station
CAUTION strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause
. Be sure to lower the antenna rod momentary static, flutter or station inter-
before entering garages, parking ference. If reception continues to be
towers and other locations with unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod is left attached, it
1) Unscrew
may scratch the roof.
2) Remove
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully The roof antenna is installed in the center
tighten it. at the rear part of the roof.
It is possible to remove the antenna rod by
unscrewing it from its base.
5-4 Audio

Installation of accessories Audio set


Always consult your SUBARU dealer Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
before installing a citizen band radio or of the following audio sets. Refer to the
other transmitting device in your vehicle. pages indicated in this section for operat-
Such devices may cause the electronic ing details.
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not NOTE
suited for the vehicle. If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.
Audio 5-5

& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-30

CONTINUED
5-6 Audio

& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-30
Audio 5-7

& Type C audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-30
. USB storage device/iPod operation:
refer to page 5-33
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-43

CONTINUED
5-8 Audio

& Type D audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-9
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-18
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-22
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-30
. USB storage device/iPod operation:
refer to page 5-33
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-43
Audio 5-9

Power and audio controls equipped. SRS CS Auto creates a 5.1ch symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs,
equivalent surround field using 6 or 7 Inc.
& Power switch and volume speakers that are installed in the . TruBass and FOCUS technologies
control vehicle. are incorporated under license from
. For type D audio, SRS TruBass and SRS Labs, Inc.
FOCUS are equipped.
. SRS Sound features:
Type A and B audio (1) Sound originating from door
mount speakers can be heard at
ear level (built in SRS FOCUS effect)
(type B and D audio).
Type C and D audio (2) Ultra rich bass sound can be
obtained from standard door mount
speakers (built in SRS TruBass
effect) (type B and D audio).
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)
and volume control. The radio is turned (3) Surround sound can be ob-
tained from 2-channel stereo
ON and OFF by pushing the dial, and the
sources such as CD, MP3 and FM
volume is controlled by turning the dial.
(built in SRS Circle Surround II
effect) (type B audio).
& Sound controls and audio (4) SRS CS Auto can position the
settings center channel image in the center
NOTE of the vehicles windshield. This
. SPEED VOLUME CONTROL is a eliminates the need for a center
function that automatically adjusts the speaker (built in SRS Circle Sur-
volume according to the vehicle speed. round II phantom center and SRS
As the vehicle speed increases, the FOCUS effects) (type B audio).
audio volume automatically increases . CS Auto, SRS and symbol are
to match the vehicle speed, in order to trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
create a pleasant listening environment . CS Auto technology is incorporated
even as the driving noise increases. under license from SRS Labs, inc.
. For type B audio, SRS CS Auto is . TruBass, FOCUS, SRS and
CONTINUED
5-10 Audio

! Tone and balance control (type A, B ! Other settings (type A, B and C mode by turning the TUNE/TRACK/CH
and C audio) audio) dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
Type A and B audio track/channel control mode after approxi-
Type A and B audio mately 5 seconds.
! Audio settings (type D audio)
Type C audio 1. Press the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial to
display SETTING Menu.
Type C audio 2. Operate the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial
Each brief press of the MENU button to select the preferred menu. You can
changes the control modes in the follow- select the menu as shown in the following
Each brief press of the TUNE/TRACK/ chart.
ing sequence.
CH dial changes the control modes in the
following sequence. Type A audio:

Choose the preferred level for each mode


by turning the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. Type B audio:
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
Type C audio:

Choose the preferred settings for each


Audio 5-11

3. Operate the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial


First menu Second menu Third menu
to select the preferred setting for each
Screen mode.
OFF
Sound Tone Bass NOTE
Mid Only Screen OFF can be displayed
Treble while driving.
Balance Balance
Fader
SVC
SRS Sound
Screen Brightness
Contrast
Screen Size
Screen Saver Picture Select
Picture Down-
load
Picture Erase
BT Audio Pair Audio
Setup Player

Select Audio
Player
Set Passkey
Delete Audio
Player
Others HD ON/OFF
Initialize

CONTINUED
5-12 Audio

! Adjustable level of each mode

Mode Range of levels Default Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise


(displayed) setting
Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control* 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
Tone and balance Bass control 8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control 8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control 8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound
Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated
Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated
Other settings SPEED VOLUME OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
BEEP (Type A, B and C audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
CS Auto (Type B audio) OFF to ON OFF OFF ON
SRS Sound (Type D audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
Brightness (Type D audio) 0 to 15 8 For less brightness For more brightness
Contrast (Type D audio) 0 to 15 8 For less contrast For more contrast
Screen size (Type D audio) Normal to Wide Wide Normal Wide
HD ON/OFF (Type D audio) OFF to ON ON ON OFF
Initialize (Type D audio) Cancel to Initialize Cancel Initialize Cancel

*: For type A and B audio, AUX volume can be adjusted only when an AUX audio product is connected.
Audio 5-13

FM/AM radio operation & Tuning ! Seek tuning (SEEK)


! Manual tuning Type A and B audio:
& FM/AM selection
Seek up
Type A and B audio Type A and B audio
Seek down
Type C and D audio

Type C and D audio


Type C audio:
Push the FM/AM button when the radio
is off to turn on the radio.
Push the FM/AM button when the radio Seek up
Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial clock-
is on to select the reception.
wise to increase the tuning frequency and
Each brief press of the FM/AM button turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial counter-
changes the radio in the following se- clockwise to decrease it.
quence starting from the last radio band Seek down
Each time the dial is turned, the frequency
with you selected.
interval can be changed between 10 kHz
Type A, B and C audio: in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM
mode. Type D audio:
! Stereo indicator
Type D audio: The stereo indicator ST (type A, B and C Seek up
audio)/STEREO (type D audio) will
illuminate when an FM stereo broadcast
is received. Seek down

If you press the or button briefly,


the radio will automatically search for a
receivable station and stop at the first one
it finds. This function may not be available,
CONTINUED
5-14 Audio

however, when radio signals are weak. In ! PTY (Program type) group tuning Type C audio:
such a situation, perform manual tuning to (only FM reception)
select the desired station. PTY group up by
one step
! Scan tuning (SCAN) Type A and B audio
PTY group down by
one step
Type A and B audio This operation only changes the display. It
Type C audio does not change the station that is
currently being received.
Type C audio
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group
Type D audio (type A, B and C audio)
Type D audio Type A and B audio:
Press the indicated button to change to
If you press the SCAN button briefly the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
Seek up
(type A, B and C audio)/continuously (type PTY group that you are currently listening
D audio), the radio will switch to the scan to (type A, B and C audio)/that you
mode. In this mode, the radio scans selected the last time (type D audio) will
Seek down
through the radio band until a station is be displayed for 10 seconds. In the PTY
found. The radio will stop at the station for selection mode, PTY is displayed on the
5 seconds (type A, B and C audio)/10 screen.
seconds (type D audio) while displaying ! PTY (Program type) group selection Type C audio:
the frequency, after which scanning will
continue until the entire band has been In the PTY selection mode, press the
scanned. following button to change the PTY group
by one step at a time. Seek up
Press the SCAN button again to cancel
the SCAN mode and to stop at any Type A and B audio:
displayed channel.
Automatic tuning may not function prop- PTY group up by
one step Seek down
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to PTY group down by
tall buildings and hills. one step
Audio 5-15

In the PTY selection mode, when the & HD RadioTM Technology (Di- com.
preferred PTY group has been selected, gital AM and FM Radio) (type
pressing the SEEK button or Press the button while receiving the
D audio) FM radio (except analog broadcast). The
seeks within that PTY group.
next channel of the station that is being
The control function returns to the normal received will be received.
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
! Mode selection
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group
(type D audio) Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial and
select the HD Radio ON mode (hybrid
In the PTY selection mode, when the mode) or OFF mode (analog mode).
preferred PTY group has been selected,
turning the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial seeks ! iTunes tagging
within that PTY group. Turning the dial To tag the received song, press the
clockwise seeks up. Turning the dial button for more than 1.5 seconds. Con-
counterclockwise seeks down. nect the iPod to store the tagged song to
The control function returns to the normal the iPod. When the iPod is connected
mode after approximately 10 seconds. to iTunes, you can purchase the tagged
HD Radio Technology is fueling the digital songs from the Apple iTunes Music
radio revolution in the United States and Store.
around the world. For the models of iPod that support
The digital technology enables broadcas- iTunes tagging, refer to the following
ters to offer new and unique FM content website: www.hdradio.com/tagging.php?
via HD2 / HD3 channels, crystal-clear id=itunes.
sound and data services on both AM
and FM bands - all free, with no subscrip- ! HD Radio indicators
tion fee. Each indicator illuminates under the fol-
HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured lowing conditions.
Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. . The indicator illuminates while the
U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM digital broadcast is received during the HD
and the HD Radio logo are proprietary Radio ON mode.
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. . The TAG indicator illuminates while
For more information, visit www.hdradio. you can operate the iTunes tagging.

CONTINUED
5-16 Audio

. The LIVE indicator illuminates while received in an area where the analog NOTE
the Ballgame is received. signal can be properly received, or the . The maximum number of characters
. The STEREO indicator illuminates system frequently switches the chan- that can be displayed for PS is 8.
while the FM stereo broadcast is received. nels between the digital and analog . The maximum number of characters
. The PTY indicator illuminates during signals. However, this does not indi- that can be displayed for RT is 64.
the PTY selection mode. cate a malfunction. If this frequent . If RT is 13 characters or longer,
switching between digital and analog press and hold the TEXT button for
! About HD Radio causes annoyance, set the radio to the 0.5 second or longer in order to change
NOTE analog mode (HD Radio off mode) that the page.
. HD Radio Technology is a hybrid provides the same radio broadcasting
broadcasting system that employs di- quality as a conventional radio. ! Type D audio
gital and analog signals. Push the TEXT button to show the next
. When the vehicle moves outside the & Displaying radio PS (Pro- page when the text is not fully displayed
digital broadcasting area (that is nar- gram Service Name) and RT while the PSD (Program Service Data) or
rower than the analog broadcasting RT (Radio Text) service is received.
(Radio Text)
area due to the FCC output require-
ments), the radio reception automati- NOTE
cally changes from the digital signal to . When the HD Radio function is
Type A and B audio
the analog signal. When the vehicle turned on, PSD provides additional
reenters the digital broadcasting area information about the broadcast. Text
again, the radio reception automatically Type C and D audio data such as Title and Artist is
changes from the analog signal to the displayed on the screen.
digital signal. When in a digital mode . When the HD Radio function is
the Logo will be in orange on the ! Type A, B and C audio turned off (HD Radio off mode), the
radio display. radio text is displayed on the screen
If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or while receiving the broadcasting sta-
. Depending on the broadcasting sta- RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
tion, a condition such as a sound delay, tion with RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data
the TEXT button changes the display System).
echo effect or skipping sound may among PS, RT and frequency. The default
occur. However, this does not indicate setting is PS.
a malfunction.
. Depending on the broadcasting
area, the digital signal may not be
Audio 5-17

& Station preset ! Selecting preset stations mode


1. Press the FM/AM button to select pressing the button
! How to preset stations switching to the other band
FM1, FM2, FM3 (type A, B and C audio)/
1. Press the FM/AM button to select FM-AS (type D audio), AM or AM-AS (type turning the TUNE/TRACK/CH
FM1, FM2, FM3 (type A, B and C audio)/ D audio) reception. dial
FM-AS (type D audio), AM or AM-AS (type pressing the SCAN button
2. Press the preferred preset button
D audio) reception. (from to ) briefly.
2. Select the preferred station. ! Displaying and selecting preset
3. Press one of the preset buttons (from stations (type D audio)
! Auto-store (type D audio)
to ) for more than 1.5 seconds Using the Auto-store function, you can 1. Press the button for 1.5 seconds
to store the frequency. If the button is automatically store 6 stations on the or longer during AM/FM reception to
pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the current waveband (FM-AS or AM-AS) by display the radio screen.
preceding selection will remain in memory. pressing the button for 1.5 seconds 2. Operate the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial
or longer. Use Auto-store to quickly find to select the stations.
NOTE the strongest stations, for example when
. Up to six FM1, FM2, FM3 (type A, B traveling through different reception areas.
and C audio)/FM-AS (type D audio), AM
and AM-AS (type D audio) stations NOTE
each may be preset. . When the HD Radio function is
. If the connection between the radio turned on, Auto-store cannot be used
and battery is broken for any reason while receiving the broadcasting sta-
such as vehicle maintenance or radio tion with SPS (Supplemental Program
removal, all stations stored in the Service).
preset buttons are cleared. If this . When you use Auto-store, the new
occurs, it is necessary to reset the stations replace any stations pre-
preset buttons. viously stored.
. If a cell phone is placed near the . Interrupting Auto-store: If you acci-
radio, it may cause the radio to emit dentally press the (Auto-store)
noise when it receives calls. This noise button, you can cancel the Auto-store
does not indicate a radio malfunction. function before it has been completed
as follows.
switching to the other source
5-18 Audio

Satellite radio operation (if (7474) for more information. Sirius, the ! XMTM satellite radio reception tips
Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos for antenna on the windshield (for
equipped) are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio U.S.A. only if equipped)
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to Inc.
install the SUBARU genuine satellite
receiver (optional equipment) and to enter & Satellite radio reception
into a contract. For details, please contact Satellite radio signals are best received in
your SUBARU dealer. areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
& XMTM satellite radio (U.S.A. tunnels or other structures that may
only) obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite
stances that may result in signal loss
radio service, including music, news,
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
sports, talk and childrens programming.
or driving on the lower level of a multi-
XMTM provides digital quality audio and
tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
text information, including song title and
artist name. A service fee is required to To help reduce this condition, satellite For some models, the satellite radio
receive the XMTM service. For more radio providers have installed ground- antenna is fixed to the upper right hand
information, contact XMTM at based repeaters in heavily populated corner of the windshield.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM- areas. However, you may still experience
The XMTM satellite radio receiver that is
RADIO (1-800-967-2346). reception problems in some areas.
fitted to your vehicle receives the neces-
sary signals from two specially designated
& Sirius satellite radio satellites that are in a geostationary orbit
Sirius satellite radio allows the listener to over the equator. One satellite covers the
experience digital sound quality and to east coast and the other covers the west
have a greater variety of channels. coast. Both of them direct their signals
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a north. These signals are then relayed
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For throughout the radio reception area by a
details, please contact your SUBARU network of ground repeater stations. The
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at satellite radio signals are transmitted as
www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS line of sight signals. The line of sight
Audio 5-19

signals can be blocked by objects such as . If you drive under a bridge unforeseen circumstances when there
buildings, but the network of repeater . If you are driving next to a tall vehicle are problems with the reception of XMTM
stations allows signal coverage within (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the satellite radio signals.
urban areas such as cities. signal
. If you are driving in a valley where the
NOTE
You may experience problems in receiving The channel guide is not yet updated if
XMTM satellite radio signals in the follow- surrounding hills or peaks block the signal
from the south the update is done while receiving the
ing situations. XMTM satellite radio signal. To complete
. If you are driving northward in a coastal . If you are driving on a mountain road
the update, turn the ignition switch to
area where the southern direction is blocked by
the LOCK position and then to the
Because the satellite radio antenna is mountains
ACC or ON position.
located on the windshield, the signal
comes from the south and may not be
able to reach the antenna in some
& Displaying satellite radio ID
circumstances when you are driving north. of tuner
When you activate satellite radio, you
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by
its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the
audio display by tuning the channel to 0.
. If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10 m or more), Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial to select
for example on a road that goes through a the satellite radio channel.
dense forest NOTE
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . The signal can become weak in some For Sirius, change the display to an
covered parking area areas that are not covered by the repeater indication mode other than the channel
. If you are driving beneath the top level station network. number after performing the above
of a multi-level freeway Please note that these may be other operation.

CONTINUED
5-20 Audio

& Band selection wise to select the next channel and turn Type D audio:
the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial counterclock-
wise to select the previous channel. Channel up by 10
Type A and B audio ! Skip channel selection steps

When in the SAT mode, press the follow- Channel down by 10


Type C audio ing button continuously (type A, B and C steps
audio)/briefly (type D audio) to change to
the channel selection mode.
Type D audio ! Category selection
Type A and B audio:
! Type A, B and C audio
Push the SAT button when the radio is Channel up by 10
steps
off to turn on the radio.
Channel down by 10 Type A and B audio
Push the SAT button when the radio is steps
on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
tion.
Type C audio: Type C audio
& Channel and category selec-
tion
Channel up by 10 To activate the category search mode,
! Channel selection steps press the PTY/CAT button. To deactivate
the category search mode, press the
PTY/CAT button again.
Type A and B audio Channel down by 10
steps

Type C and D audio

Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial clock-


Audio 5-21

When in the category search mode, press When in the category search mode, press radio will stop at the station for 5 seconds
the following button to change the cate- the following button to change the cate- while displaying the channel number, after
gory up or down. gory up or down. which scanning will continue until the
entire channel has been scanned from
Type A and B audio: the low end to the high end.
Category up by one
step Press the SCAN button briefly (type A, B
Category up by one
step and C audio)/for more than 1.5 seconds
Category down by
Category down by (type D audio) again to cancel the SCAN
one step mode and to stop on any displayed
one step
channel.
When a category is selected, turning the
Type C audio: TUNE/TRACK/CH dial selects channels & Channel preset
only within the selected category. The
Category up by one control function returns to the normal ! How to preset channels
step mode after approximately 10 seconds. 1. Press the SAT button to select SAT1,
Category down by ! Channel scan SAT2 or SAT3 reception.
one step
2. Select the desired channel.
When a category is selected, turning the 3. Press one of the preset buttons (from
Type A and B audio to ) for more than 1.5 seconds
TUNE/TRACK/CH dial selects channels
only within the selected category. to store the channel. If the button is
The control function returns to the normal pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the
Type C audio
mode after approximately 10 seconds. preceding selection will remain in memory.

! Type D audio
Type D audio NOTE
When in the SAT mode, press the
. Up to six SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3
button to change the category search
Press the SCAN button briefly (type A, B channels each may be preset.
mode.
and C audio)/for more than 1.5 seconds . If the connection between the radio
(type D audio) to change the radio to the and battery is broken for any reason
SCAN mode. In this mode, under the such as vehicle maintenance or radio
selected category, the radio scans through removal, all channels stored in the
the channel until a station is found. The preset buttons are cleared. If this

CONTINUED
5-22 Audio

occurs, it is necessary to reset the CD player operation


preset buttons.
! Selecting preset channels NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
1. Press the SAT button to select SAT1, with the label side up. If a disc is
SAT2 or SAT3 reception. inserted with the label side down, the
2. Press the preferred preset button player displays CHECK DISC. Refer
briefly. to When the following messages are
displayed F5-29.
! Displaying and selecting preset . If a disc is inserted during a radio
stations (type D audio) broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
1. Press the button for 1.5 seconds broadcast.
or longer during satellite radio reception to . After the last song finishes, the disc
display the radio screen. will automatically return to track 1 (the
2. Operate the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial first track on the disc) and will auto-
to select the stations. matically play back.
. The player is designed to be able to
& Display selection (type A, B play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
and C audio) ones.
. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not
supported, and if inserted, they will be
Type A and B audio
immediately ejected.
. CDs that can be played back are
Type C audio accompanied by the following restric-
tions.
Maximum number of folders: 255
Press the TEXT button while receiving Maximum number of files in a
the satellite radio to change the display as folder: 255
follows.
Audio 5-23

Maximum number of files on a AAC (type C audio): & How to insert a CD(s) (type B)
CD: 510 (type A, B and C audio)/999 . Based on MPEG4 AAC
(type D audio) 1. Briefly press the button. If the
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24, magazine in the player has an idle
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8 position where you can insert a disc, the
& Play file . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 disc number indicator associated with the
NOTE . Number of channels: 1 to 2ch idle position will blink.
. Copyright protected MP3/WMA/AAC If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
AAC (type D audio): no idle position in the magazine.
files will not be played by the system.
. Based on MPEG2 AAC and MPEG4 2. When the LOAD indicator illumi-
The player will automatically skip to the
AAC nates, insert the disc. Once you have
next file (track).
. WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Profes- . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24, inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will
sional and WMA9 voice cannot be 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8 turn off. The disc will then be automatically
played. . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 drawn in, and the player will begin to play
. Number of channels: 1 to 2ch back the first track of the disc.
MP3:
& How to insert a CD (type A, C . To insert more discs in succession,
. Based on MPEG1, 2 and 2.5 Layer3 repeat steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24, and D) be loaded with discs in the ascending
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8 Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole order of position number.
. Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 while gripping the edge of the disc, then If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
. Supports variable bit rates insert it in to the slot (with the label side after you have pressed the button,
up) and the player will automatically pull the player will begin to play back the first
WMA (type A, B and C audio): the disc into position. track of the last disc you have inserted.
. Based on Windows Media Audio 9 . The disc indicator steadily lights up if a
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32 NOTE
disc is already inserted in the correspond-
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192 DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
ing position of the magazine.
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT THE SAME
WMA (type D audio): TIME. . While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press or button, the
. Based on Windows Media Audio 7, 8 player will enter the standby mode. Press
and 9 the button to start playback.
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
CONTINUED
5-24 Audio

! Loading all the magazine (full disc first track.


! Inserting a disc in a desired posi-
loading mode)
tion ! When CD is in the player (type A)
1. If you continue to press the
1. Briefly press the button. If the When the button is pressed, the
button for more than 1.5 seconds, the
magazine in the player has an idle player will start playback.
player will produce beep sound and will
position where you can insert a disc, the ! When there are CDs loaded (type B)
enter the full disc loading mode.
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink. 2. When the disc number indicator Press a desired one of the disc select
flashes and ALL LOAD indicator illumi- buttons (from to ) the disc
The positions in the magazine the indica-
nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a number indicator of which steadily lights
tor of which steadily lights up are already
disc is successfully loaded during this up. The player will then start playback of
loaded with discs.
period, the disc number indicator will stop the selected CD, beginning with the first
2. Press the disc select button (from blinking and will steadily light. track.
to ) at the position where you
3. When the loading of a disc is com- If a disc that the player cannot read has
want to insert a disc.
plete, the next disc number indicator will been loaded, the player will display the
3. When the LOAD indicator illumi- blink. Then repeat step 2. message CHECK DISC.
nates, insert the disc. Once you have
4. When the magazine is filled with discs ! When CD is in the player (type C
inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will
by repeating steps 2 and 3, the player will and D)
turn off. The disc will then be automatically
start playback of the discs, beginning with
drawn in, and the player will begin to play Each brief press of the button
the one inserted first.
the first track on the disc. changes the modes in the following
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 sequence.
. If you wish to insert another disc,
seconds interval, the full disc loading
repeat the procedure beginning with step
mode will be canceled, and the player will
1.
start playback of the disc inserted first.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the button, & How to play back a CD
*: For type C audio, BT-A is displayed.
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted. ! When there is no CD inserted
When the CD mode is selected, the player
. While the player is in the loading mode, Properly insert a CD. Refer to How to will start playback.
if you press or button, the insert a CD (type A, C and D) F5-23 /
player will enter standby mode. Press the How to insert a CD(s) (type B) F5-23.
button to start playback. When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
Audio 5-25

& To select a track from its . Skipping past the first track/file NOTE
beginning (track) will take you to the last track/ If you fast-forward to the end of the last
file (track) in the folder. track/file (track), fast-forwarding will
stop and the player will start playback
& Fast-forwarding and fast-re- beginning with the first track/file
Type A and B audio (track). In an MP3, WMA or AAC (type
versing
C and D audio) folder, the player will
! Fast-forwarding start playback beginning with the first
track/file (track) of the current folder.
Type C and D audio
Type A and B audio ! Fast-reversing

Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial clock- Type A and B audio


wise to skip to the beginning of the next Type C audio
track/file (track). Each time the dial is
turned, the indicated track/file (track)
number will increase. Type C audio
Type D audio
Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial counter-
clockwise to skip to the beginning of the
current track/file (track). Each time the dial Press the button continuously to fast- Type D audio
is turned, the indicated track/file (track) forward the disc/folder.
number will decrease. Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
Press the button continuously to fast-
NOTE reverse the disc/folder.
With an MP3, WMA or AAC (type C and Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
D audio):
. Skipping past the last track/file NOTE
(track) will take you back to the first If you fast-reverse to the beginning of
track/file (track) in the folder. the first track/file (track), fast-reversing
will stop and the player will start play-
back. In an MP3, WMA or AAC folder
(type C and D audio), the player will
CONTINUED
5-26 Audio

start playback beginning with the first Type D audio: steps.


track/file (track) of the current folder. . Press the button
. Press the disc select button (type B
& Repeating audio)
. Press the SCAN button (type A, B
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press and C audio)
the following button (repeat button) while NOTE . Press the LOAD button when
the track/file (track) is playing. there is free space in the CD magazine
. The RPT (type A, B and C audio)/
One PRT (type D audio) indication (type B audio)
Type A and B audio refers to the repeat playback of a single
track. It repeats the track that is play- & Random playback
ing.
Type C audio . The F-RPT (type A, B and C audio)/ To playback a track/file(s) at random,
Folder RPT (type D audio) indication press the following button (random button)
refers to the repeat playback of a folder. while the track/file is playing.
Type D audio It repeats the all of the tracks in the
folder. It is possible to select the Type A and B
audio*1
Each time you briefly press the button, the function when the MP3/WMA/AAC for-
mode changes in the following se- mat track is playing.
quences. . The D-RPT indication refers to the Type C audio*1
repeat playback of a disc. It repeats the
Type A and C audio:
tracks on the CD. It is only possible to
select this function for type B audio. Type D audio*2
To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play
mode, briefly press the RPT button and *1: For type A, B and C audio, press the button
select CANCEL. The RPT indication will for 0.5 second or longer.
*: Type C audio only *2: For type D audio, briefly press the button.
Type B audio: turn off, and the normal playback mode
will be resumed. Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequences.
NOTE
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
Audio 5-27

Type A audio: MP3/WMA/AAC format CD is playing. & Scan (type A, B and C audio)
. The F-RDM (type A, B and C
audio)/Folder RDM (type D audio)
indication refers to the random play- Type A and B audio
back in the folder. It randomly repeats
the tracks in the folder. It is possible to
select the function when an MP3/WMA/ Type C audio
Type B audio: AAC format track is playing.
. The D-RDM indication refers to the The scan mode lets you listen to the first
random playback of a disc. It randomly 10 seconds of each track/file in succes-
repeats the tracks in the CD. It is sion. Press the SCAN button to start
possible to select the function when scanning upward beginning with the track/
an MP3/WMA format track is playing. file(s) following the currently selected one.
Type C audio: To cancel the random playback mode, After all track/file(s) in the disk/folder have
press the RDM button again and select been scanned, normal playback will be
CANCEL. resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
The RDM indication will turn off, and the the SCAN button again.
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
Type D audio: NOTE The scan mode will be cancelled if you
Random playback will be cancelled if perform any of the following steps.
you perform any of the following steps. . Press the RPT button
. Press the button . Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial
. Press the disc select button (type B . Press the or side of the
audio) FOLDER/PTY/CAT button
NOTE . Press the SCAN button (type A, B . Press the button
. The RDM (type A, B and C audio)/ and C audio) . Press the disc select button (type B
Track RDM (type D audio) indication . Press the LOAD button when audio)
refers to the random playback of the there is free space in the CD magazine . Select the mode other than CD mode
tracks. It randomly repeats the tracks (type B audio) . Press the LOAD button when
on the CD. It is possible to select the there is free space in the CD magazine
function when formats other than the (type B audio)
CONTINUED
5-28 Audio

. Turn off the power of the audio For iPod: & Folder selection
equipment
. Turn the ignition switch to the NOTE
LOCK position . Selecting folders in this way is
possible only within a single disc.
. Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are re-
& Display selection (type A, B ! Page (track/folder title) scroll cognized when an attempt to select the
and C audio) If you press the TEXT button again for at next or previous folder is made. If no
least 0.5 second, the title will be scrolled appropriate folder exists on the disc,
so you can see all of it. pressing the or side of the
Type A and B audio FOLDER/PTY/CAT button starts play-
NOTE back beginning with the first track/file
. For type A and B audio, the display (track).
Type C audio is designed to show titles for up to 24 Press the following buttons briefly.
characters.
If you press the TEXT button during . For type C audio, the display is Type A and B audio:
playback, the display will change as designed to show titles as shown in
shown in the following sequence. the following items. To select the next
folder
For CD-DA: When playing a CD-DA: 256 char-
acters To go back to the
previous folder
When playing an MP3/WMA/AAC:
64 characters
When playing an iPod : 255 Type C audio:
For MP3/WMA/AAC: characters
. If no operations are performed for 10 To select the next
seconds, the screen that was displayed folder
before pressing the TEXT button for To go back to the
more than 0.5 second will be shown. previous folder
Audio 5-29

Type D audio: & How to eject CDs from the NOTE


player (type B) . Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
To select the next sticking out, because vibration might
folder ! Ejecting a CD from the player make it fall out.
You can select and remove only one disc . If you press the button while
To go back to the at a time from the discs that are loaded. the player is in all disc ejection mode,
previous folder the mode will be cancelled following
1. Use the disc select button (from
to ) to select the disc to be ejected. ejection of the disc that is currently
& How to eject a CD from the 2. Briefly press the button. The being ejected.
selected disc will be ejected. The disc . If you press the button or
player (type A, C and D button while the player is in all disc
audio) number indicator will flash at this time.
When you remove the ejected disc, the ejection mode, the player will draw in
When a disc is being played back or when disc number indicator will turn off. the discs that have been ejected and
a disc is in the player, press the play them.
button. The disc will be ejected. To remove more discs in succession,
repeat steps 1 and 2. & When the following mes-
NOTE sages are displayed
! Ejecting all discs from the player
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD (all disc ejection mode) If one of the following messages is
sticking out, because vibration might displayed while operating the CD player,
make it fall out. 1. If you continue to press the
determine the cause based on the follow-
. If the disc is left ejected for more button, the player will produce beep sound
ing information. If you cannot clear those
than approximately 15 seconds after and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At
messages, please contact your SUBARU
the ignition switch is turned to the this time, the disc number indicator and
dealer.
OFF position, a disc protection func- ALL EJECT indicator will flash.
tion will operate, automatically reload- 2. Remove the disc that has been ! When PUSH EJECT is displayed
ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not ejected. The other discs loaded will then Press the eject button to unload the disc.
played. be ejected one after another. If you do not Check the disc for damage or deforma-
remove the disc that has been ejected, the tion, and also check that the correct disc is
All disc ejection mode will be canceled. inserted. Do not try to unload the disc
forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected and this message

CONTINUED
5-30 Audio

will be displayed. If the disc cannot be Auxiliary input jack (if


unloaded or this message remains dis-
played, please contact your SUBARU
equipped) Type A and B audio

dealer.
! When CHECK DISC is displayed Type C and D audio
Press the eject button to unload the discs.
Check that the disc is not damaged or 2. Press the CD/AUX button on the
scratched, and also check that the disc is audio control panel to turn on the auxiliary
inserted correctly. This message may audio input.
appear when using some CD-RW discs. 3. Play back the portable audio player.
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch Refer to the Owners Manual for the
CDs are not supported) and data format portable audio player.
are correct. This player can only play
MP3, WMA (all models) and AAC (type C
and D audio) data formats. If the disc NOTE
cannot be unloaded or this message . The AUX input jacks of the models
remains displayed, please contact your 1) Models without Hands-free system with the genuine SUBARU navigation
SUBARU dealer. 2) Models with Hands-free system system are the RCA type. For detailed
By connecting a commercial audio pro- information, refer to the Owners Man-
duct to the vehicle, such as a portable ual supplement for the navigation sys-
audio player, you can hear its sound via tem.
the vehicles speakers. . The output sound of the portable
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is present in audio player is not loud, and the sound
the center console. A stereo mini pin plug via the vehicles speakers that are
(3.5) can be inserted in this jack. The connected to the vehicle audio set
connection cable is available at electrical may be very low. If you turn up the
appliance or similar stores. volume of the audio set, the volume
becomes louder. However, when you
To use the AUX input jack: change from one portable audio player
1. Connect a portable audio player to the to another one, the volume levels via
AUX input jack. the vehicles speakers may be signifi-
cantly louder compared to the prior
Audio 5-31

device. To avoid a large volume differ- Precautions to observe when


ence, turn down the volume when you
change between portable audio
handling a compact disc
players. Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
. In some cases, when the sound CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
volume of the portable audio player is following. Also, some compact discs
low, the sound becomes bad when you cannot be played.
turn up the volume of the vehicle audio
system. In this case, adjust the sound
volume of the portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
cause of a bad connection between the
portable player and the vehicle audio
system. Try cleaning the stereo jack
and audio plug.
. If noise is not reduced, check for
disconnection of the cord or malfunc-
tions of the portable player.

CONTINUED
5-32 Audio

there are deposits, wipe the disc surface


from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD . Insert discs one by one into the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the player (type B audio).
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
Audio 5-33

USB storage device / iPod . A USB memory that is powered by a & Connectable iPod models
source other than the USB power
operations (type C and D supply (for example, an AC power
Type C audio:
audio) adapter, etc.) cannot be operated. Model Firmware version
. A USB memory that is connected to
& Play file the memory card reader or multi card 5G 1.3
Refer to Play file F5-23. reader cannot be operated. 5.5G 1.3
. If the USB memory consists of two classic 2.0.4
& Connectable USB storage drives or more, the system will recog-
device nize only one of the drives after con- nano 2G 1.1.3
Mass storage class USB memory can be necting the USB memory. iPod nano 3G 1.1.3
connected. USB storage devices that can . The contents stored in the USB nano 4G 1.0.4
be played back are accompanied by the memory may not be played in the same
following restrictions. order as they appear on a personal nano 5G 1.0.2
. Maximum directory layers: 8 layers computer. touch 1G 3.1.2
(including the ROOT) . A personal computer cannot be touch 2G 3.1.2
. Maximum number of files in a folder: used even if it is connected to the
system using a USB cable. 1G 3.1.2
255
. If the USB memory has a security iPhone 3G 3.1.2
. Maximum number of folders: 512 (type
function, the contents stored in the 3G S 3.1.2
C audio)/255 (type D audio) (including the
USB memory cannot be played by the
ROOT)
system.
. Maximum number of files in the device: . A USB memory and an iPod cannot
130,560 (type C audio)/2,500 (type D be connected to the system at the
audio) same time.
NOTE
. HUB class USB memory cannot be
played.
. ATAPI subclass USB cannot be
played.
. For type C audio, High Speed USB
2.0 cannot be played.
CONTINUED
5-34 Audio

Type D audio: or material that is legally permitted to . Do not store an iPod in the
be copied and played by using an vehicle. If an iPod is left in the
Model Firmware version iPod and iTunes. Copyright infringe- vehicle for a long period of time,
5G 1.3 ment is prohibited by law. it may be deformed, discolored
. To check the firmware version of an or damaged by high temperature.
classic 2.0.4
iPod, connect it to a computer and
nano 1.3.1 check the device manager. For further
nano 2G 1.1.3 information, see the Users Guide that NOTE
iPod comes with the iPod . Even if a USB storage device or
nano 3G 1.1.3
. To update the firmware version of an iPod is connected, it cannot be played
nano 4G 1.0.4 iPod, visit the Apple Inc. website. unless the button is pressed.
touch 3.1.3 . Depending on the model and firm- . A movie cannot be played while an
ware version of an iPod, it may not iPod is connected.
touch 2G 3.1.3
work properly or not operate at all. . While an iPod is connected, the
1G 3.1.3 iPod cannot be operated using the
iPhone 3G 3.1.3 & Connecting USB storage de- click wheel on the iPod (except some
models).
3G S 3.1.3 vice / iPod . When using an iPod by connecting
it to in-vehicle equipment, the order of
WARNING the list items displayed on the in-
CAUTION
vehicle equipment may be different
Do not operate an iPod while
Do not connect an iPod other than from that on the iPod. However, this
driving; it may distract your atten-
the previously stated models. Doing does not indicate a malfunction.
tion from driving and can lead to an
so may result in a malfunction or, . An iPod battery that is connected
accident.
depending on conditions, cause a to in-vehicle equipment will be charged
fire. when the ignition switch is in the ON
CAUTION or Acc position. However, activation
of the iPod may be delayed if the
NOTE . If the data stored in an iPod is battery charge of the iPod is low.
. iPod is a registered trademark of deleted while it is connected to . If an iPod does not activate after
Apple Inc. the in-vehicle system, the data operation, disconnect the connection
. You are only permitted to personally cannot be recovered. cable from the iPod and reset it. For
copy and play copyright-free material the resetting procedure, see the Users
Audio 5-35

Guide that comes with the iPod. Type C audio: & To select a track/index from
. If an iPod and the connection cable its beginning
are connected improperly, the iPod
cannot be powered on or will not be Select a track/index in the same way that
recognized by in-vehicle equipment. In a track is selected when a CD is played.
this case, disconnect the connection For details, refer to To select a track from
cable from the iPod, and then connect its beginning F5-25.
it again.
*: Only when a Media Hub is connected. & To select a chapter from its
Type D audio: beginning when connecting
iPod
While podcasts or audiobooks are playing,
select a chapter in the same way that a
track is selected when a CD is played. For
details, refer to To select a track from its
When the USB/iPod mode is selected, beginning F5-25.
the player will start playback of the USB
storage device/iPod.
& Fast-forwarding and fast-re-
versing
NOTE Fast forward or reverse is operated in the
. Depending on the number of files same way a CD is played. For details,
The USB connector is located in the stored in an iPod and the firmware refer to Fast-forwarding and fast-rever-
center console. Use the connector to version, the iPod may not activate sing F5-25.
connect a USB storage device/iPod. smoothly after operation or not work
properly. NOTE
& How to play back . Do not disconnect the connector When connecting iPod:
from an iPod during iPod operation. . When the end of an index is reached
1. Connect a USB storage device/iPod .
2. Press the button. Each time you while fast forwarding, fast forwarding
briefly press the button, the mode ends and play begins from the begin-
changes in the following sequence. ning of the next index.
. When the beginning of an index is
reached while rewinding, rewinding
CONTINUED
5-36 Audio

ends and play begins from the begin- NOTE When connecting USB storage device
ning of the index. . The ALL RPT indication refers to (type C audio):
the repeat playback of all indexes in the
& Repeating entire iPod.
. The SONG RPT (type C audio)/
! When connecting USB storage de- ONE RPT (type D audio) indication
vice refers to the repeat playback of a single When connecting USB storage device
Repeating is operated in the same way a index. It repeats the index that is (type D audio):
CD is played. For details, refer to Re- playing.
peating F5-26. . When an audiobook is playing, the
mode does not change even if you
! When connecting iPod press the RPT button.

When connecting iPod (type C audio):


Type C audio & Random playback

Type D audio Type C audio


When connecting iPod (type D audio):
Each time you briefly press the RPT Type D audio
button, the mode changes in the following
sequence.
Type C audio: To playback a track/index/file(s) at ran-
dom, press the RDM button for 0.5 NOTE
second or longer (type C audio)/briefly
Type D audio: (type D audio) while the track/index/file is . The FOLDER RDM indication re-
playing. fers to the random playback in the
folders. It randomly repeats all of the
Each time you press the button, the mode tracks in the folder.
changes in the following sequence. . The ALL RDM indication refers to
the random playback in the entire USB
storage device. It randomly repeats all
of the tracks in the USB storage device.
Audio 5-37

. The ALBUM RDM indication refers NOTE & Display selection


to the shuffle playback of the album. It When an iPod is connected, you Refer to Display selection (type A, B and
sequentially plays back all of the cannot select the SCAN mode. C audio) F5-28.
indexes in the album.
. The SONG RDM indication refers ! Page scroll
to the shuffle playback in the entire & Selecting category (only
Refer to Page (track/folder title) scroll
iPod. It randomly repeats all of the when connecting iPod) F5-28.
indexes in the iPod. When the button is pressed for less
. When an iPod is connected, the than 1.5 seconds, the iPod menu is & Folder selection (only when
files are played back at random by the displayed. connecting USB storage de-
shuffle function of the iPod. There-
fore, iPod operation may be different Each time you turn the TUNE/TRACK/ vice)
depending on the model of the con- CH dial clockwise, the displayed category Refer to Folder selection F5-28.
nected iPod. changes in the following sequence. Each
. When an audiobook or a podcast is time you turn the dial counterclockwise, NOTE
playing, the mode does not change the displayed category changes in the When an iPod is connected, you
even if you press the RDM button for opposite sequence. cannot select a folder.
0.5 second or longer (type C audio)/
briefly (type D audio). & Setting the playing speed
To cancel the random playback mode, (only when the audiobook is
press the RDM button for more than 0.5 playing) (type D audio)
second (type C audio)/briefly (type D Each time you briefly press (the
audio) and select CANCEL. The RDM RPT button) while the audiobook is
indication will turn off, and the normal playing, the playing speed changes in
playback mode will resume. the following sequence.
& SCAN (only when connecting
USB storage device) To select the category, press the dial. To
Scan is operated in the same way a CD is close the iPod menu, press the
played. For details, refer to Scan (type A, button for more than 1.5 seconds. To
B and C audio) F5-27. return to the previous screen, briefly press
the button.
CONTINUED
5-38 Audio

& When the following mes- ! When NO USB is displayed (type Audio control buttons (if
sages are displayed D audio) equipped)
If one of the following messages is This message is displayed under the
displayed while connecting the USB sto- following conditions. These buttons are located on the spokes
rage device/iPod, determine the cause . No USB storage devices/iPod are of the steering wheel. They allow the
based on the following information. If you connected. driver to control audio functions without
cannot clear those messages, please . A non-connectable USB storage de- taking his/her hands off the steering
contact your SUBARU dealer. vice/iPod is connected. wheel.
! When CHECK DEVICE is dis- Connect a connectable USB storage & MODE button
played device/iPod.
This message is displayed under the ! When No song is displayed (type
following conditions. D audio)
. When there is a short in the USB bus
This message is displayed when no
. When a non-corresponding device (for playable audio files are in the connected
example a USB mouse) is connected USB storage device/iPod. Connect a
. When a non-corresponding iPod is USB storage device/iPod that has play-
connected able audio files stored in it.
. When a connected iPod is frozen
. When a transmission malfunction oc-
curs
. When an iPod confirmation malfunc-
tion occurs
Models without Hands-free system
. When a HUB class USB storage
device is connected
Disconnect the USB storage device/iPod
and check it.
Audio 5-39

Type C and D audio: & and buttons

*1: The frequency last received in the selected


waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when the device is connected.

Models with Hands-free system ! Models with Hands-free system


The MODE button is used to select the Press this button for more than 1.5 Models without Hands-free system
desired audio mode. Each time it is seconds if you wish to immediately cut
pressed, the mode changes to the next the volume to zero.
one in the following sequence: The audio display will show MUTE.
Type A and B audio: If you press the button for more than 1.5
seconds again, the original sound volume
will return and MUTE turns off.

Models with Hands-free system

CONTINUED
5-40 Audio

! With radio mode selected skip backward in the channel order.


Press the button or button briefly. The channel will be shown on the audio
The radio will seek the next preset station display.
and stop on it.
Press the button or button & Volume control buttons
continuously. The radio will seek the next
receivable station and stop on it.
That stations frequency will be shown on
the audio display.
! With CD mode selected
Press the button to skip forward in the
track/file (track) order. Press the
button to skip backward in the track/file Models with Hands-free system
(track) order. The track/file (track) number Press the + button to increase the
will be shown on the audio display. volume. Press the button to reduce
the volume.
When the MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
A number indicating the volume will be
playing, press the button continuously
Models without Hands-free system shown on the audio display.
to select the next folder. Press the
button continuously to go back to the
previous folder.
! With USB/iPod mode selected
Press the button to skip forward in the
track/file (track) order. Press the
button to skip backward in the track/file
(track) order. The track/file (track) number
will be shown on the audio display.
! With SAT mode selected
Press the button to skip forward in the
channel order. Press the button to
Audio 5-41

& MUTE button (models with- Bluetooth audio (type C and NOTE
out Hands-free system) D audio) You cannot set a Bluetooth audio
while driving.
This function enables you to play back
! Registering (pairing) device
audio sources from Bluetooth audio
devices. You need to register the Blue- 1. Select the PAIR AUDIO (type C
tooth audio device in the system before audio)/Pair Audio Player (type D audio)
using it. menu. If a device is already registered,
MEMORY FULL is displayed and the
& Media format mode changes to the Bluetooth audio
setting mode.
Bluetooth audio devices cannot be
connected if they are not compatible with 2. After the passkey is shown on the
the following Bluetooth profiles. display, input the passkey into the cell
phone. If you input the correct passkey,
. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
PAIRED is displayed and the registering
Profile)
Press the button if you wish to procedure is finished. If you input an
. AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control incorrect passkey, FAILED is displayed,
immediately cut the volume to zero. Profile)
The audio display will show MUTE. the registering procedure was not suc-
cessful and the mode changes to the
If you press the button again, the original & Setting Bluetooth audio Bluetooth audio setting mode.
sound volume will return and MUTE
turns off. 1. Select BT-A SETUP by pressing the
MENU button (type C audio)/Select BT NOTE
Audio Setup by pressing the TUNE/ After the ignition switch is turned to the
TRACK/CH dial (type D audio). LOCK position, the registered device
2. Perform the following procedure by is not automatically connected to the
operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial system even if the ignition switch is
while BT-A (type C audio)/BT Audio turned to the Acc or ON position.
(type D audio) is displayed.
! Selecting device
1. Select the SELECT AUDIO (type C
audio)/Select Audio Player (type D

CONTINUED
5-42 Audio

audio) menu. If no devices are registered, changes to the Bluetooth audio setting ! Random playback
EMPTY is displayed and the mode mode. Random playback is operated in the same
changes to the Bluetooth audio setting way a CD is played. Refer to Random
mode. & Bluetooth audio operation playback F5-26. Each time you press the
2. Select the CONFIRM menu. If the button for 0.5 second or longer (type
device is connected, SELECTED is
NOTE C audio)/ button (the RDM button)
displayed and the selecting procedure is Depending on the connected device, it briefly (type D audio), the mode changes
finished. If the device cannot be con- may not activate as per the following in the following sequence.
nected, FAILED is displayed and the items or not work smoothly.
selecting procedure was not successful. ! How to play back
! Setting passkey Press the button and select the BT-
A (type C audio)/BT Audio (type D
1. Select the SET PASSKEY menu. audio) mode.
After the currently set passkey is dis- ! Display selection (type C audio)
played, a new passkey can be entered. ! To select a track from its beginning Select an item to be displayed using the
2. Input the new passkey by operating Select a track in the same way that a track same method as when a CD is played.
the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. is selected when a CD is played. Refer to Refer to Display selection (type A, B and
3. Select the CONFIRM menu. The new To select a track from its beginning F5- C audio) F5-28. Each time you briefly
passkey is displayed, the passkey is 25. press the button, the indication
changed and the mode changes to the ! Repeating changes in the following sequence.
Bluetooth audio setting mode. Repeating is operated in the same way a
CD is played. Refer to Repeating F5-26.
! Deleting device Each time you briefly press the
1. Select the DELETE AUDIO (type C button (type C audio)/ button (the
audio)/Delete Audio Player (type D RPT button) (type D audio), the mode ! Folder selection
audio) menu. If no devices are registered, changes in the following sequence. Select a folder in the same way a folder is
EMPTY is displayed and the mode selected when a CD is played. Refer to
changes to the Bluetooth audio setting Folder selection F5-28.
mode.
2. Select the CONFIRM menu. DE-
LETED is displayed and the mode
Audio 5-43

Hands-free system (if & Tips for the Hands-free sys- with it left in the breast pocket or bag.
equipped) tem NOTE
! Bluetooth . The Hands-free system may not
NOTE operate properly under the following
. For models with the genuine conditions.
SUBARU navigation system, refer to The cell phone is turned off.
the Owners Manual supplement for the The cell phone is not in the
navigation system. phone call area.
. When selling your vehicle, make The battery of the cell phone has
sure that you initialize the Hands-free run down.
system to prevent personal data from The cell phone is not connected
being improperly accessed. to the Hands-free system.
The Hands-free system operates while the The cell phone is behind the seat
ignition switch is in the Acc or ON or in the glove box.
position. A metal material covers or
touches the cell phone.
NOTE . Depending on the type of cell phone
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are that is used, the screen on the cell
registered trademarks of Bluetooth phone may remain illuminated while
SIG, Inc. the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi-
It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
nation off by adjusting the cell phone
in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
settings.
tooth format (wireless) to make a phone
call from the in-vehicle equipment or take . Depending on the setting of the cell
an incoming phone call. phone, the dial lock function may be
activated after making a call. Deacti-
Since the Bluetooth format is wireless, a
vate the automatic dial lock function of
connection between the in-vehicle equip-
the cell phone before using the Hands-
ment and the cell phone can be made
free system.
without placing them in close proximity of
each other. The cell phone can be used . Depending on the type of cell phone
that is used, operation and the sound
CONTINUED
5-44 Audio

volume may be different from those of When the cell phone is too close Rules. Operation is subject to the
cell phones currently used. to the microphone. following two conditions: (1) this de-
. When the ignition switch is turned to . The sound quality may degrade due vice may not cause harmful interfer-
the LOCK position during a call, the to the influence of the cell phone that is ence, and (2) this device must accept
call may be disconnected or continued connected to the system or the circum- any interference received, including
on the cell phone depending on the stances of the Bluetooth network. interference that may cause undesired
type of cell phone that is used. Note . When another Bluetooth device is operation.
that operation of the cell phone may be simultaneously connected, noise may
necessary if the call is continued on the be heard in the voice coming from the NOTE
cell phone. hands-free phone. This equipment has been tested and
. Do not speak at the same time as the found to comply with the limits for a
other party during a call. If you and the ! Corresponding profiles for the cell Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
party speak at the same time, it may be phone 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
difficult for the other party to hear your . HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0 designed to provide reasonable protec-
voice and vice versa. This is normal. . OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1 tion against harmful interference in a
. The receiver sound volume should residential installation. This equipment
be set as low as possible. Otherwise, & Certification for the Hands- may cause harmful interference to
the party you are calling may notice an free system radio communications, if it is not
undesirable echo sound. installed and used in accordance with
. Speak clearly and loudly. CAUTION the instructions. However, there is no
. Your voice may be difficult to be guarantee that interference will not
heard by the party under the following FCC WARNING occur in a particular installation. If this
conditions. equipment does cause harmful inter-
Changes or modifications not ex-
ference to radio or television reception,
Driving on a rough road. pressly approved by the party re-
which can be determined by turning the
Driving at a high speed. sponsible for compliance could void
equipment off and on, the user is
Driving with a window open. the users authority to operate the
encouraged to try to correct the inter-
When air from the ventilator equipment.
ference by one or more of the following
blows directly towards the micro- measures.
phone. NOTE . Reorient or relocate the receiving
When the sound coming from the antenna.
This device complies with Part 15 of
ventilator is loud. . Increase the separation between the
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Audio 5-45

equipment and receiver. & Safety precautions . In the frequency band used by
. Connect the equipment into an out- this equipment, along with indus-
let on a circuit different from that to WARNING trial, scientific and medical
which the receiver is connected. equipment such as a microwave
. Consult the dealer or an experi- . For safety reasons, avoid operat- oven, radio stations (a license is
enced radio/TV technician for help. ing the cell phone while driving. required) to be used by the
. Changes or modifications not ex- . Do not make a phone call while production line in the factory to
pressly approved by the party respon- driving. When you have an in- identify movable bodies, specific
sible for compliance could void the coming call, stop the vehicle in a small power radio stations (a
users authority to operate the equip- safe location before taking the license is not required) and ama-
ment. incoming phone call. When you teur radio stations (a license is
. This equipment complies with FCC/ have to absolutely take a phone required) are being operated.
IC radiation exposure limits set forth call, tell the caller Ill call you (These three types of radio sta-
for an uncontrolled equipment and back. And then call the caller tions are hereinafter referred to
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) back after stopping the vehicle in as other radio stations.) Before
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C a safe location. using this equipment, be sure to
to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio check to see if other radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This stations are being operated in
equipment has very low levels of RF CAUTION the vicinity. If there is detrimental
energy that it deemed to comply with- radio interference from this
out maximum permissive exposure . Do not leave the cell phone in the equipment to other radio sta-
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable vehicle. The temperature in the tions, move the equipment to
that it should be installed and operated vehicle may become extremely another location as soon as
keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or high and cause a malfunction of possible to avoid radio interfer-
more away from persons body (ex- the cell phone. ence. The frequency band used
cluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet . When using the cell phone, be by this equipment is in the 2.4
and ankles). careful not to get it close to the GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
. This transmitter must not be co- in-vehicle equipment. Getting it is employed as a modulation
located or operated in conjunction with too close to the in-vehicle equip- method. The expected inflicting
any other antenna or transmitter. ment may result in deterioration interference distance is less than
in tone quality or a poor connect- 10 m (33 ft). This equipment uses
ing condition. a full band and can avoid a band

CONTINUED
5-46 Audio

used by a movable body identifi- system. Perform the following procedure ! Menu list of the Hands-free system
cation device. to register a cell phone. Turn the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial to select
1. Press the OFF hook switch . a menu, and then press the dial to enter
2. Select ENGLISH/FRANAIS by the selected menu.
& Using the Hands-free system operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
Then WELCOME! will be displayed.
! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
3. Press the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or
the talk switch .
4. Select the RECORD NAME menu.
5. Say the name to be registered.
6. Select the CONFIRM menu. After
CAR M_MEDIA is displayed, a pass key
is displayed.
7. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell phone while PKY: **** (type C
audio)/PASS KEY: **** (type D audio) is
displayed. If you input the correct pass
key, PAIRED is displayed and the
registration procedure is finished. If you
1) OFF hook switch input an incorrect pass key, FAILED is
2) ON hook switch displayed and the registration procedure
3) Talk switch was not successful.
To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
OFF hook switch . To turn off the NOTE
Hands-free mode, press the ON hook When the ignition switch is turned to
switch . the Acc or ON position, the regis-
! Preparation for using the Hands- tered cell phones are automatically
free system connected to the system.
Before using the Hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a cell phone in the
Audio 5-47

First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page


PHONE BOOK* ADD ENTRY BY VOICE Adding a new number by voice 5-50
BY PHONE Adding a new number by cell phone 5-50
MANUAL INPUT Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-50
CALL HISTORY Adding a new number from the call history 5-51
GO BACK
LIST NAMES Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-51
CHANGE NAME Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-52
SET SPD DIAL/SET Registering a speed dial 5-52
SPEED DIAL
DELETE ENTRY Deleting phonebook data 5-52
DEL SPD DIAL/DE- Deleting a registered speed dial 5-52
LETE SPEED DIAL
GO BACK
REDIAL DIAL Redialing 5-53

STORE Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history 5-51
memory
DELETE Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-52
GO BACK
CALLBACK DIAL Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-53

STORE Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history 5-51
memory
DELETE Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-52
GO BACK

*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.

CONTINUED
5-48 Audio

First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page


SETUP SECURITY SET PIN Setting a PIN code 5-54
PHBK LOCK*/
PHONE BOOK Locking the phonebook 5-54
LOCK*
PHBK UNLOCK*/
PHONE BOOK UN- Unlocking the phonebook 5-54
LOCK*
GO BACK
PHONE SETUP PAIR PHONE Registering a new cell phone 5-46
SELECT PHONE Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-54
CHANGE NAME Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-54
LIST PHONES Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-55
SET PASSKEY Changing the pass key 5-55
DELETE Deleting the registered cell phone 5-55
GO BACK
SYSTEM SETUP GUIDANCE VOL/
GUICANCE VOLUME Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-55

INITIALIZE Initialization 5-55


SEL LANGUAGE/SE- Selecting the language (using the Hands-free system) 5-55
LECT LANGUAGE
GO BACK
GO BACK

*: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
Audio 5-49

! Voice command system The commands available for the voice


phone book add ajouter lentre
command system are listed in the follow- 20 entry dans le registre
ing chart.
21 phone book modifier le nom
Command change name dans le registre

English Franais 22 phone book delete supprimer lentre


entry du registre
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zro) phone book list lister les noms du
23 names registre
2 1 (one) 1 (un)
3 2 (two) 2 (deux) phone book set configurer compo-
24 speed dial sition abrge pour
4 3 (three) 3 (trois) le registre
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre) phone book delete supprimer compo-
25 speed dial sition abrge pour
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq) le registre
1) OFF hook switch 7 6 (six) 6 (six)
2) ON hook switch 26 phone book unlock dverrouiller
gistre
le re-
3) Talk switch 8 7 (seven) 7 (sept)
9 8 (eight) 8 (huit) 27 cancel annuler
To turn on the voice command system,
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf) 28 help aide
press the talk switch briefly. To turn off
the voice command system, wait for 5 11 * (star) * (toile) 29 repeat rpter
seconds without using the voice command 30 go back retourner
12 # (pound) # (carr, dise)
system.
13 + (plus) + (plus) 31 mute sourdine

14 callback rappel 32 dial composer

15 redial recomposer 33 previous prcdent

composer par nu- 34 delete supprimer


16 dial by number mro 35 store enregistrer
17 dial by name composer par nom 36 confirm confirmer
18 phonebook registre rglages du tl-
37 phone setup phone
19 setup rglages

CONTINUED
5-50 Audio

! Updating phonebook data phone.


38 security scurit
NOTE 4. Select the RECORD NAME menu by
39 pair phone jumeler le tl- operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or
phone The maximum number of phonebook press the talk switch .
40 change name modifier le nom entries that can be registered in the
phonebook is 50. 5. Say the name (voice tag) to be
41 select phone slectionner le tl- registered.
phone ! Registering by voice 6. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then
42 list phones lister les tl- STORED is displayed and the mode
phones 1. Select the BY VOICE menu.
changes to the registering speed dial
2. Press the talk switch . mode. Refer to Registering speed dial
43 set pass key configurer le
passe-partout 3. Say the phone number to be regis- F5-51.
44 add entry ajouter lentre
tered.
4. Select the CONFIRM menu. ! Registering by inputting manually
45 delete entry supprimer lentre
5. Select the RECORD NAME menu by 1. Select the MANUAL INPUT menu by
46 delete speed dial supprimer compo- operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or
sition abrge operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
press the talk switch .
47 by voice vocalement
2. Input the phone number to be regis-
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be tered.
48 by phone par tlphone registered.
3. Select the RECORD NAME menu by
49 call history historique dappels 7. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or
STORED is displayed and the mode press the talk switch .
50 set speed dial configurer compo- changes to the registering speed dial
sition abrge 4. Say the name (voice tag) to be
mode. Refer to Registering speed dial
51 incoming entrant registered.
F5-51.
5. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then
52 outgoing sortant
! Registering by phone STORED is displayed and the mode
53 list names lister les noms changes to the registering speed dial
54 set PIN configurer NIP 1. Select the BY PHONE menu. mode. Refer to Registering speed dial
2. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then F5-51.
verrouiller le regis-
55 phone book lock tre TRANSFER is displayed.
3. Transfer the data from the cell phone. NOTE
For details about transferring the data,
While inputting the phone numbers, if
refer to the Owners Manual of the cell
Audio 5-51

GO BACK (type C audio)/BS (type 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be phone number.
D audio) is chosen using the TUNE/ registered.
TRACK/CH dial, the character that was 7. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then NOTE
input last is deleted. STORED is displayed and the mode If the number to be used is already
changes to the registering speed dial registered in speed dial, OVER-
! Registering from call history mode. Refer to Registering speed dial WRITE? will be displayed.
1. Select the CALL HISTORY menu. F5-51.
2. Select OUTGOING or INCOMING ! List names function
by operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. ! Registering from call back The voice tags registered in the phone-
3. Select the phone number by operating 1. Select the CALL BACK menu. book are spoken by using the list names
the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. 2. Select the phone number by operating function. To use the list names function,
4. Select the RECORD NAME menu by the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. perform the following procedure.
operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or 3. Select the STORE menu. 1. Select the LIST NAMES menu.
press the talk switch . 4. Select the CONFIRM menu. 2. Choose the registered data by press-
5. Say the name (voice tag) to be 5. Select the RECORD NAME menu by ing the talk switch or by operating the
registered. operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. Then SE-
6. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then press the talk switch . LECTED is displayed. You can choose
STORED is displayed and the mode 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be the following menus.
changes to the registering speed dial registered.
mode. Refer to Registering speed dial . DIAL to make a phone call
F5-51. 7. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then . CHANGE NAME to change the name
STORED is displayed and the mode (voice tag)
changes to the registering speed dial . SET SPD DIAL/SET SPEED DIAL
! Registering from redial
mode. Refer to Registering speed dial to set the speed dial
1. Select the REDIAL menu. F5-51.
. DELETE ENTRY to delete the name
2. Select the phone number by operating (voice tag) from the phonebook
the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. ! Registering speed dial
. GO BACK to go back to the menu
3. Select the STORE menu. 1. After registering phonebook data, se- mode
4. Select the CONFIRM menu. lect the SPEED DIAL menu.
5. Select the RECORD NAME menu by 2. Press the preset button (from to NOTE
operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or ) in which you want to register the . After LIST NAMES is selected, if
press the talk switch .
CONTINUED
5-52 Audio

the OFF hook switch is pushed, the tag. ! Deleting the redial data
selected number is called. 3. Select the CONFIRM menu (only
. After LIST NAMES is selected, if 1. Select the REDIAL menu.
after saying the voice tag).
no operation is performed, the mem- 2. Select the phone number by operating
4. Press the preset button (from to
ories are displayed and voice tags are the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
) in which you want to register the
spoken. After all memories/voice tags phone number. 3. Select the DELETE menu.
are displayed/spoken, END OF LIST 4. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then
is displayed and the mode changes to ! Deleting the phonebook data DELETED is displayed and the selected
the PHONE BOOK menu mode. redial data is deleted.
1. Select the DELETE ENTRY menu.
! Changing voice tag 2. Select the phone number by perform- ! Deleting the callback data
1. Select the CHANGE NAME menu. ing either of the following procedures.
1. Select the CALLBACK menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating Operate the TUNE/TRACK/CH
dial 2. Select the phone number by operating
the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial/by pressing the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
the talk switch and saying the voice Press the talk switch and say
the voice tag 3. Select the DELETE menu.
tag.
3. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then 4. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then
3. Select the CONFIRM menu (only
DELETED is displayed and the selected DELETED is displayed and the selected
after saying the voice tag). Then the
phonebook data is deleted. callback data is deleted.
selected phone number/name is dis-
played.
! Deleting the speed dial ! Making a phone call
4. Press the talk switch .
5. Say the new voice tag. 1. Select the DEL SPD DIAL/DELETE ! Making a phone call by saying name
6. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then SPEED DIAL menu. 1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
CHANGED is displayed. 2. Press the preset button (from to 2. Press the talk switch .
) in which you want to delete the
3. Say DIAL BY NAME.
! Set speed dial speed dial.
4. Press the talk switch again.
1. Select the SET SPD DIAL/SET 3. Select the CONFIRM menu. Then
DELETED is displayed and the selected 5. Say the desired name (voice tag) to be
SPEED DIAL menu. called.
speed dial is deleted.
2. Select the phone number by operating 6. Select the DIAL menu.
the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial/by pressing
the talk switch and saying the voice
Audio 5-53

3. Select the desired number by turning ! Taking a phone call and declining
! Making a phone call by saying an incoming call
number the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
4. Perform either of the following proce- To take a phone call: Press the OFF
1. Select the top menu (phone menu). hook switch .
dures.
2. Press the talk switch . To put an incoming call on hold: Press
Press the OFF hook switch .
3. Say DIAL BY NUMBER. Press the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial, the ON hook switch briefly.
4. Press the talk switch again. then select the DIAL menu. To decline an incoming call: Press the
5. Say the desired phone number to be ON hook switch for more than 1.5
called. ! Callback seconds.
6. Select the DIAL menu. 1. Select the CALL BACK menu. ! Volume control
2. Press the OFF hook switch .
! Making a phone call from speed dial
3. Select the desired number by turning
It is possible to select a phone number the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
from speed dial registered with the in- 4. Perform either of the following proce-
vehicle equipment to make a phone call. dures.
1. Select the top menu (phone menu). Press the OFF hook switch .
2. Press the preset button (from to Press the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial,
) in which the desired number is then select the DIAL menu.
registered.
3. Press the OFF hook switch . ! Making a phone call from list name
It is possible to select a phone number
NOTE from the list name registered with the in-
When a preset button for which num- vehicle equipment to make a phone call. You can adjust the phone call volume, the
bers are not registered is pressed, an For details, refer to List names function voice volume and the voice guidance
error message is indicated on the audio F5-51. volume. Refer to Volume control buttons
screen. ! Top redial F5-40.
! Redial 1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
1. Select the REDIAL menu. 2. Press the OFF hook switch and
2. Press the OFF hook switch . load the outgoing call history.
3. Select the DIAL menu.
CONTINUED
5-54 Audio

! Adjustable level of each volume TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or saying the ! Phone setup
number.
3. Select the CONFIRM menu. If the ! Setting pair phone
Volume Range Initial setting
inputted PIN code is correct, LOCKED is Refer to Preparation for using the Hands-
Phone call 0 to 14 7
displayed and the phonebook is locked. free system F5-46.
Voice 0 to 14 7
! Selecting phone
Voice guidance 0 to 6 3 NOTE To select the registered cell phone for
While the phonebook is locked, if the connecting to the in-vehicle equipment,
& Bluetooth setting operation restricted menu is selected, perform the following procedure.
PHBK LOCK is displayed. 1. Select the SELECT PHONE menu. If
! Security setting
! Unlocking the phonebook no cell phones are registered, EMPTY is
! Setting PIN code displayed and the mode changes to the
The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is 1. Select the PHBK UNLOCK/PHONE- PHONE SETUP mode.
used when locking the phonebook. BOOK UNLOCK menu. Then CUR- 2. Select the cell phone by operating the
RENT PIN? is displayed. TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or saying the
1. Select the SET PIN menu. Then
CURRENT PIN? is displayed. NOTE voice tag.
2. Input the current PIN code by operat- 3. Select the CONFIRM menu (only
If the phonebook is not locked, UN-
ing the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or saying after saying the voice tag). SELECTED
LOCK is displayed and the mode
the number. is displayed, the selected cell phone is
changes to the security mode.
3. Select the CONFIRM menu. connected to the in-vehicle equipment and
2. Input the PIN code by operating the the mode changes to the PHONE SET-
4. Input the new PIN code by operating
TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or saying the UP mode.
the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or saying the
number.
number.
3. Select the CONFIRM menu. If the ! Changing the voice tag of the cell
5. Select the CONFIRM menu.
inputted PIN code is correct, UN- phone
LOCKED is displayed and the phone- 1. Select the CHANGE NAME menu. If
! Locking the phonebook book is unlocked. no cell phones are registered, EMPTY is
1. Select the PHBK LOCK/PHONE- displayed and the mode changes to the
BOOK LOCK menu. Then CURRENT PHONE SETUP mode.
PIN? is displayed.
2. Select the cell phone by operating the
2. Input the PIN code by operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or saying the
Audio 5-55

voice tag. . GO BACK to go back to the PHONE ! Setting guidance volume


3. Register the voice tag. For details, SETUP mode
To set the guidance volume, perform the
refer to Preparation for using the Hands- following procedure.
free system F5-46. ! Setting passkey
1. Select the GUIDANCE VOL/GUI-
1. Select the SET PASSKEY menu. DANCE VOLUME menu.
! List phones function After the currently set passkey is dis- 2. Set the guidance volume by operating
The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell played, a new passkey can be entered. the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
phone list are spoken by using the list 2. Input the new passkey by operating
phones function. the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or saying the ! Initializing the registered data
1. Select the LIST PHONES menu. If passkey.
To initialize the registered data, perform
no cell phones are registered, EMPTY is 3. Select the CONFIRM menu. The new the following procedure.
displayed and the mode changes to the passkey is displayed, the passkey is
PHONE SETUP mode. 1. Select the INITIALIZE menu.
changed and the mode changes to the
2. Registered cell phones are displayed PHONE SETUP mode. 2. Select the CONFIRM menu. First
on the saved side. While displayed, if the PLEASE WAIT, then INITIALIZED is
TUNE/TRACK/CH dial is turned, the ! Deleting registered cell phone from displayed. The registered data is initia-
next registered cell phone is displayed. the list lized and the mode changes to the last
Press the ON hook button to close the mode.
1. Select the PHONE SETUP menu.
Hands-free menu.
2. Select the DELETE menu. ! Selecting language
3. Select a cell phone by operating the
TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or pressing the 3. Select a cell phone to be deleted by To select the language, perform the
talk switch . Then SELECTED is operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial or following procedure.
displayed. saying a voice tag. 1. Select the SEL LANGUAGE/SE-
4. Select the following menus. 4. Select the CONFIRM menu. DE- LECT LANGUAGE menu.
LETED is displayed, the data is deleted 2. Select the desired language by oper-
. SELECT PHONE to connect the and the mode changes to the PHONE ating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
selected cell phone SETUP mode.
. CHANGE NAME to change the voice
tag ! System setup
. DELETE to delete the selected cell You can select the following menus only
phone from the list by operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
5-56 Audio

Screensaver (type D audio) Pressing the power switch For details, refer to Audio settings (type D
. Insert a CD (except reloading a CD) audio) F5-10.
If the following operations are not per- . Connect a USB storage device or an 3. Select the preferred JPEG file by
formed for more than 30 seconds while iPod operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
the audio is ON, the screensaver will be 4. Select Wide or Normal by operating
displayed. NOTE the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
. Operate any button or dial The screensaver is not displayed under
. Shift the shift lever/select lever to the the following conditions.
NOTE
R position . While the ignition switch is in the
LOCK position . JPEG files that are 10 MB or less can
. A cell phone registered in the Hands- be saved.
free system is called . While the audio is OFF
. While the screen is OFF . If the file name is too long, the file
. While talking on a cell phone regis- may not be saved.
If one of the following operations is
tered in the Hands-free system . Up to two JPEG files can be saved in
performed, the screensaver turns off and
. While setting the audio the in-vehicle equipment.
the operation screen will be displayed.
. While seek tuning, PTY group tun- . If the aspect ratio of the displayed
. A cell phone registered in the Hands- picture is 16:9, Wide cannot be
free system is called ing, scan tuning or auto-storing while
the FM/AM radio is on. selected.
. The update for satellite radio starts. . If the aspect ratio of the displayed
. While in the category search mode
. The update for satellite radio stops. picture is 4:3, Normal cannot be
of the satellite radio
. While the rear view camera is being selected.
If one of the following operations is
performed, the screensaver turns off. used & Selecting picture
However, the operation screen will not
be displayed. & Downloading picture 1. Select the Picture Select menu by
. Operate any button or any dial in a operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. For
Perform the following procedure to down- details, refer to Audio settings (type D
condition other than the following condi- load a picture to be used as screensaver.
tions audio) F5-10. If no pictures are saved,
1. Connect a USB storage device. Refer No Data is displayed. Press the
Pressing the button while a to Connecting USB storage device / button to return to the Screen Saver
mode other than the CD mode is iPod F5-34. mode.
selected
2. Select the Picture Download menu 2. Select the preferred picture by operat-
Pressing the volume control buttons by operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
of the audio control buttons ing the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
Audio 5-57

& Erasing picture


1. Select the Picture Erase menu by
operating the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial. For
details, refer to Audio settings (type D
audio) F5-10. If no pictures are saved,
No Data is displayed. Press the
button to return to the Screen Saver
mode.
2. Select the preferred picture by operat-
ing the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial.
3. Operate the TUNE/TRACK/CH dial
to select OK to erase the picture or
Cancel to cancel the operation.

Interior equipment

Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2 Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-11


Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Floor mat ............................................................ 6-12
Cargo area light .................................................. 6-3 Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-13
Map light............................................................. 6-3 Coat hook........................................................... 6-13
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4 Cargo area cover (dealer option)...................... 6-13
Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-5 Using the cover ................................................. 6-13
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5 To remove the cover .......................................... 6-14
Glove box ........................................................... 6-5 To install the cover housing ............................... 6-15
Center console.................................................... 6-5 Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-15
Overhead console ............................................... 6-7 Under-floor storage compartment
Rear seat center table (if equipped) ..................... 6-7 (if equipped) .................................................... 6-16 6
Coin tray............................................................. 6-7
Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-17
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-8 How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-18
Front passenger cup holder................................. 6-8 Viewing range on the screen .............................. 6-18
Rear passenger cup holder (if equipped).............. 6-8 Help line............................................................ 6-20
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-9
Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) .......... 6-10
6-2 Interior equipment

Interior lights The automatically illuminated dome light


remains on for several seconds and then
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the gradually turns off after all doors and the
lights are turned off to avoid battery rear gate are closed.
discharge. While the light is illuminated, if any of the
following operations are performed, the
& Dome light dome light turns off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
LOCK position to the Acc or ON
position.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Type B
1) ON The setting of the period for which the light
2) DOOR remains on (OFF delay timer) can be
3) OFF changed as follows.
. Models with genuine SUBARU navi-
The dome light switch has the following gation system:
three positions.
The setting can be changed using the
ON: The light remains on continuously. navigation monitor. For details, please
Type A
OFF: The light remains off. refer to the Owners Manual supplement
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- for the navigation system. Also, the setting
matically in the following cases. can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
opened. . Models without genuine SUBARU
. The doors or the rear gate are un- navigation system:
locked using the remote keyless entry The setting can be changed by a
transmitter. SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
. The ignition switch is turned from the dealer for details.
Acc position to the LOCK position.
Interior equipment 6-3

& Cargo area light & Map light ! Door interlock switch

1) DOOR 1) Map light switch (lens) 1) Door interlock switch


2) OFF
3) ON To turn on the map light, push the lens. Although the map light switches (lenses)
To turn it off, push the lens again. are in the OFF position (manually off), the
The cargo area light switch has the map lights can be set to illuminate auto-
following three positions. When leaving the vehicle, make sure the matically in conjunction with the opening
light is turned off to avoid battery dis- of the doors by use of the door interlock
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear charge. switch. The door interlock switch has the
gate is opened. The light remains illumi- following two positions.
nated for several seconds and turns off
after the rear gate is closed. OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
OFF: The light remains off. automatically in conjunction with the open-
ON: The light remains on continuously. ing of the doors. But, the lights can be
turned on manually by pushing the map
light switches (lenses).
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
gate is opened. (The map lights do not
CONTINUED
6-4 Interior equipment

illuminate when only the rear gate is . Models without genuine SUBARU Sun visors
opened.) navigation system:
. The doors are unlocked using the The setting can be changed by a
remote keyless entry transmitter. SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
. The ignition switch is turned from the dealer for details.
Acc position to the LOCK position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
remain on for several seconds and then
gradually turn off after all doors are
closed. While the lights are on, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the map lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
LOCK position to the Acc or ON
position. To block out glare, swing down the visors.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked To use the sun visor at a side window,
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. swing it down and move it sideways.
The setting of the period for which the
lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed as follows.
. Models with genuine SUBARU navi-
gation system:
The setting can be changed using the
navigation monitor. For details, please
refer to the Owners Manual supplement
for the navigation system. Also, the setting
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
Interior equipment 6-5

& Vanity mirror Storage compartment & Glove box


CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid . Always keep the storage com-
being temporarily blinded by the partment closed while driving to
glare of bright light. reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment. 1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. & Center console
The center console box provides a sto-
rage space. In addition, the top of the
console can be used as an armrest.

CONTINUED
6-6 Interior equipment

To use as an armrest: driving position. Make sure the armrest is


securely retained.
To return the console top to the vertical
position, raise the console top.

CAUTION
Do not step or sit on the armrest,
and do not place heavy objects on it.
The armrest could break, and you
could get hurt.

To use as storage space:


1) Pocket console
1. Tip the console top forward from its The pocket console can be used to store
vertical position. small items.

CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your hands
between the console top and con-
sole box when raising and tipping
the console top.

Raise the console top to the vertical


position.

2. Push the armrest part of the console


top forward to the desired position. Adjust
the position of the armrest to suit your
Interior equipment 6-7

& Overhead console & Rear seat center table (if cup holders.
equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not step or sit on the rear seat
center table, and do not place
heavy objects on it. The rear seat
center table could break, and you
could get hurt.
. When pulling out or returning the
rear seat center table, make sure
not to pinch fingers or other body
parts.

To open the console, push on the console


lid lightly and the lid will automatically
& Coin tray
To use the rear seat center table, pull the
open. strap up.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is in the sun or
on a warm day, the inside of the
overhead console heats up. Avoid
storing plastic or other heat-vulner-
able or flammable articles such as a
lighter in the overhead console.

A coin tray is built in the center console.


The rear seat center table can be used as
a storage space and as rear passengers
6-8 Interior equipment

Cup holders & Rear passenger cup holder (if


equipped)
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.

& Front passenger cup holder


A dual cup holder is built in the center
CAUTION console, beside the parking brake lever.
Do not pick up a cup from the cup A dual cup holder is located on the rear
holder or put a cup in the holder seat center table.
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.

The cup holder rear partition can be


removed and placed on the front partition.
This space can be used to store small
items.
Interior equipment 6-9

Bottle holders trim can be used to hold beverage bottles Accessory power outlets
and other items.

CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
door pocket, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald Power outlet below the climate controls
you.

Power outlet in the center console

The door pocket equipped on each door

CONTINUED
6-10 Interior equipment

CAUTION tight for the accessory power


outlet, this can result in a poor
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette contact or cause the plug to get
lighter in the accessory power stuck. Only use plugs that fit
outlets. properly.
. Do not place any foreign objects, . Use of an electric appliance in the
especially metal ones such as accessory power outlet for a long
coins or aluminum foil, into the period of time while the engine is
accessory power outlet. That not running can cause battery
could cause a short circuit. Al- discharge.
ways put the cap on the acces- . Before driving your vehicle, make
sory power outlet when it is not sure that the plug and the cord
in use. on your electrical appliance will
Power outlet in the cargo area
. Use only electrical appliances not interfere with your shifting
Accessory power outlets are provided gears and operating the accel-
which are designed for 12V DC.
below the climate controls, in the center erator and brake pedals. If they
console and in the cargo area. Electrical The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected do, do not use the electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is appliance while driving.
available at any of the outlets when the is 120W. Do not use an appliance
ignition switch is in either the Acc or ON which exceeds the indicated wat-
position. tage for each outlet.
& Use with a cigarette lighter
You can use an in-vehicle electrical When using appliances con- (dealer option)
appliance by connecting it to an outlet. nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power To use the accessory power outlet as a
The maximum power rating of an appli-
consumed by them must not cigarette lighter socket, purchase the
ance that can be connected is 120W. Do
exceed 120W. Overloading the cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional
not use an appliance which exceeds the
accessory power outlet can accessory.
indicated wattage for each outlet.
cause a short circuit. Do not use A cigarette lighter plug is available from
When using appliances connected to two
double adapters or more than your SUBARU dealer.
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not one electrical appliance. The cigarette lighter operates only when
exceed 120W. . If the plug on your electric appli- the ignition switch is in the ON or Acc
ance is either too loose or too position.
Interior equipment 6-11

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the power a plug-in accessory. Doing Ashtray (if equipped)
knob and wait a few moments. It will so may cause the plug to stick
automatically spring up when ready for and overheat, creating a potential
use. fire hazard. CAUTION
WARNING . Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
To avoid being burned, never grasp cigarette in an ashtray. This
the lighter by the end with the could cause a fire.
heating element. Doing so could
. Always extinguish matches and
result in injury and could also
cigarettes before putting them
damage the heating element.
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
CAUTION the ashtray open, the fire on the
cigarette tip may spread to an-
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in, other cigarette butt and start a
because it will overheat. fire.
. Do not use a non-genuine cigar- . Do not put flammable material in
ette lighter plug in the socket. the ashtray.
Doing so may cause a short- . Do not leave a lot of cigarette
circuit and overheating, resulting butts in the ashtray.
in a fire.
. If the socket is ever used for a
plug-in accessory such as a cell
phone, that may damage the
portion of the sockets internal
mechanism that causes a cigar-
ette lighter plug to pop out
after its lighter element is heated.
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
ette lighter plug in a socket that
has been used, even once, to
CONTINUED
6-12 Interior equipment

Floor mat

The portable ashtray can be installed in


each cup holder. For the locations of the CAUTION
cup holders, refer to Cup holders F6-8. Retaining pins are located on the drivers
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the Make sure the drivers floor mat is
side floor.
ashtray. When removing the ashtray from placed back in its proper location
The floor mat is secured using the built-in and correctly secured on its retain-
a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards. grommets, by placing the grommets over
Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to ing pins. Also, do not use more than
the pins and pushing them downward. one floor mat. If the floor mat slips
help reduce residual smoke.
forward and interferes with the
NOTE movement of the pedals during
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu- driving, it could cause an accident.
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
trays inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement.
Interior equipment 6-13

Shopping bag hook Coat hook Cargo area cover (dealer op-
tion)
CAUTION The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
Do not hang items on the shopping
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
detachable to make room for additional
more.
cargo.

& Using the cover

A coat hook is attached to each side of the


cargo area.

CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the drivers
A shopping bag hook is attached to each view or that could cause injury in
side of the cargo area. sudden stops or in a collision. Do no
hang items on the coat hook that To extend the cover, pull the end of the
weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or more. cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.

CONTINUED
6-14 Interior equipment

of gas from the stays, which may & To remove the cover
result in their inability to hold the
1. Rewind the cover.
rear gate open.
. If the vehicle is equipped with a
reclining rear seatback feature,
when reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.

Install the front cover behind the rear


seatback.

WARNING 2. Push the switch that is next to the right


end of the cover housing.
Do not place anything on the ex- 3. Take it off the retainer.
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.

CAUTION
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover. Scratches
on the stays could cause leakage
Interior equipment 6-15

& To install the cover housing both ends of the sleeve into the recesses Cargo tie-down hooks
of the retainers.

1. Remove the cover of the retainers by


prying on the edge with a flat-head The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
screwdriver. down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
storing recesses.

2. Insert the projections located on the

CONTINUED
6-16 Interior equipment

CAUTION Under-floor storage compart- . Do not store spray cans, contain-


ment (if equipped) ers with flammable or corrosive
The cargo tie-down hooks are de- liquids or any other dangerous
signed only for securing light cargo. items in the storage compart-
Never try to secure cargo that ment.
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 44
lbs (20 kg) per hook.

The storage compartment is located under


the floor of the cargo area, and it can be
used to store small items. To open the lid,
pull the tab up.

CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
Interior equipment 6-17

Rear view camera (if always check the rear view and frozen on the camera, you must
equipped) the surrounding area with your be very careful removing it.
eyes and mirrors, and move Otherwise, damage done to the
backward at a slow speed. Mov- camera may cause a fire or
ing backward only by checking electric shock. Pour water or
the monitor could cause an acci- lukewarm water over the camera
dent. to remove mud and ice, and wipe
. Do not disassemble or modify the it with a soft, dry cloth.
camera, switch or wiring. If . Do not put a flame close to the
smoke comes out or you smell camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
a strange odor, stop using the mage or fire may occur.
rear view camera immediately. . When replacing the fuse, be sure
Contact your SUBARU dealer to use a fuse with the specified
for an inspection. Continued use rating. Use of a fuse with a
may result in accident, fire or different rating may result in a
electric shock. malfunction.
A rear view camera is attached to the rear
. If the rear view camera is used for
gate. When the ignition switch is ON and
CAUTION a long time while the engine is
the shift lever (MT models) or select lever
not operated, the battery may
(AT models) is set to R, the rear view
. If your vehicle is washed with a become completely discharged.
camera automatically displays the rear
view image from the vehicle on the high-pressure washer, do not
navigation monitor. allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water in the NOTE
camera lens may result in con- . Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
WARNING benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
densation, malfunction, fire or
. Since the rear view camera uses electric shock. discoloration may occur. To remove
a wide-angle lens, the image on contamination, wipe the camera with a
. Since the camera is a precision
the monitor is different from the cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
device, do not subject it to strong
actual view in terms of distance. detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur. dry cloth.
. Since the range of the image on . When waxing the vehicle, be careful
the monitor is limited, you should . If mud or snow sticks to or is not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
CONTINUED
6-18 Interior equipment

comes in contact with the camera, NOTE & Viewing range on the screen
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted . For models with the genuine
neutral detergent to remove the wax. SUBARU navigation system, the image
. The camera lens has hard coating to of the rear view camera has priority
help prevent scratches. However, when over other screen displays. Therefore,
washing the vehicle or cleaning the while the rear view camera is in opera-
camera lens, be careful not to scratch tion, the operations of other screens
the camera lens. Do not use a washing are disabled. To operate other screens,
brush directly on the camera lens. The set the shift lever or select lever to a
monitor screen may be adversely af- position other than R.
fected. . The image of the rear view camera is
. Strong light shined on the camera horizontally reversed as is the case
lens may develop white light stripes with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
around the light source. This is not a side view mirror.
malfunction. . It may be difficult to see the image of Range of view
. Under fluorescent light, the display the rearview camera in the following
may flicker. However, this is not a cases. This is not a malfunction of the
malfunction. camera.
. The image of the rear view camera The vehicle is in a dark place (at
may be slightly different from the night, in a tunnel, etc.).
actual color of the objects. The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
& How to use the rear view An object (such as raindrops,
camera snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
When the shift lever or select lever is set view of the rear view camera sticks
to R, the rear view camera automatically to the lens of the camera.
displays the rear view image from the Strong light shined directly on
vehicle. When the lever is set to other the camera lens (occasionally, there
positions, the image before setting to R are vertical lines on the screen). Range of view
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to ON.
2. Set the shift lever or select lever to R.
Interior equipment 6-19

tion cannot be seen on the screen.

CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.

Image from camera Range of view


The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.

CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly. Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-

CONTINUED
6-20 Interior equipment

& Help line CAUTION ! When there is an upward slope at the


The help line (distance marker and vehicle back
width line) is a guide to help you realize . When moving backward, always
the actual distance from the screen. check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi- 1) 3 feet (1 m)
tion.
The distance on the screen looks farther
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) than the actual distance.
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper ! Difference between screen and ac-
(green horizontal line) tual road
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line) The distance markers show the distance
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper for a level road when the vehicle is not
(yellow horizontal line) loaded. It may be different from the actual
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper distance depending on the loading condi-
(red horizontal line) tions or road conditions.
6) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to position R, the monitor screen dis-
plays the help lines together with the rear
view image.
Interior equipment 6-21

! When there is a downward slope at ! Feature of distance marker


the back

1) 3 feet (1 m) line
1) 3 feet (1 m) 2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance. The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
NOTE close behind, distance cannot be correctly
When cargo is loaded, the rear view displayed.
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.

Starting and operating

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2 SPORT mode..................................................... 7-20


Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2 Power steering................................................... 7-21
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3 Braking ............................................................... 7-22
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-6 Braking tips....................................................... 7-22
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7 Brake system .................................................... 7-22
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-23
MT models .......................................................... 7-7 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-23
AT models........................................................... 7-8 ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-23
Stopping the engine............................................ 7-9 ABS warning light.............................................. 7-23
Remote engine start system (dealer option) ..... 7-9 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Starting your vehicle .......................................... 7-10 system ............................................................. 7-24
Remote start safety features ............................... 7-10 Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-24
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-25 7
start................................................................. 7-10 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-27
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-27
shutdown......................................................... 7-10 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the (U.S.-spec. models)......................................... 7-28
vehicle ............................................................. 7-11 Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-29
Service mode ..................................................... 7-11 Parking brake .................................................... 7-29
Remote transmitter programming and Parking tips ....................................................... 7-30
programmable feature option............................ 7-11
System maintenance .......................................... 7-12 Hill start assist system (MT models)................ 7-31
Hill start assist warning light.............................. 7-32
Manual transmission.......................................... 7-13
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-14 Cruise control .................................................... 7-32
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-14 To set cruise control .......................................... 7-33
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-34
Automatic transmission..................................... 7-15
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-34
Select lever ........................................................ 7-16
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-35
Shift lock function .............................................. 7-17
Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-36
Selection of manual mode .................................. 7-19
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-36
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-20
7-2 Starting and operating

Fuel line (lower than 91 AKI (95 RON)) is emission performance with gasoline that
used, knocking, reduced output and meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
poor accelerator response will result. fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
CAUTION any other state than California, your
! Fuel octane rating vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Use of a fuel which is low in quality This octane rating is the average of the Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
or use of an inappropriate fuel Research Octane and Motor Octane side California is permitted to have higher
additive may cause engine damage. numbers and is commonly referred to as sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
the Anti Knock Index (AKI). mance of your vehicles catalytic converter
Using a gasoline with a lower octane and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
& Fuel requirements rating can cause persistent and heavy smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
knocking, which can damage the engine. a different brand of unleaded gasoline
! Non-turbo models
Do not be concerned if your vehicle having lower sulfur to determine if the
The engine is designed to operate using sometimes knocks lightly when you drive problem is fuel related before returning
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with service.
! Turbo models the specified octane rating and your ! MMT
The engine is designed to operate using vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
premium unleaded gasoline with an ! Unleaded gasoline hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler you use such fuels, your emission control
not available, regular unleaded gasoline nozzle. Under no circumstances should system performance may deteriorate and
with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) leaded gasoline be used because it will the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
or higher may be temporarily used. For damage the emission control system and function indicator lamp may turn on. If this
optimum engine performance and drive- may impair driveability and fuel economy. happens, return to your authorized
ability, it is required that you use premium SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
grade unleaded gasoline. ! Gasoline for California-certified
determined that the condition is caused
LEV
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
NOTE If your vehicle was certified to Californias be covered by your warranty.
Be sure to use premium unleaded low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
gasoline of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
for turbo engine models. If other gaso- it is designed to optimize engine and
Starting and operating 7-3

! Gasoline for cleaner air been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- fuel may damage the paint, be sure
Your use of gasoline with detergent sions. to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
additives will help prevent deposits from Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
As additional guidance, only use fuels
forming in your engine and fuel system. is not covered under the SUBARU
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
This helps keep your engine in tune and Limited Warranty.
following description.
your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a & Fuel filler lid and cap
in this manual.
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is ! Refueling
and other additives, you should never
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Only one person should be involved in
need to add any fuel system cleaning
Methanol can be used in your vehicle refueling. Do not allow others to approach
agents to your fuel tank.
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
Many gasolines are now blended with mixture AND if it is accompanied by pipe while refueling is in progress.
materials called oxygenates. Use of these sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- Be sure to observe any other precautions
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. vents and corrosion inhibitors required to that are posted at the service station.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in under these conditions.
your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
SUBARU dealer.
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle . Fuel system damage or driveability
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of
reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station CAUTION
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
CONTINUED
7-4 Starting and operating

. When opening the cap, grasp it


firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the cap
quickly. Fuel may be under pres-
sure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid 1) Open


release lever up. The lever is on the floor 2) Close
at the left of the drivers seat. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap, WARNING
first touch the vehicle body or a . Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
metal portion of the fuel pump or mable. Before refueling, always
similar object to discharge any first stop the engine and close all
static electricity that may be present vehicle doors and windows.
on your body. If your body is carry- Make sure that there are no
ing an electrostatic charge, there is lighted cigarettes, open flames
a possibility that an electric spark or electrical sparks in the adja- 3. Hook the cord that is attached to the
could ignite the fuel, which could cent area. Only handle fuel out- fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new doors. Quickly wipe up any filler lid.
static electric charge, do not get spilled fuel.
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
Starting and operating 7-5

WARNING NOTE spilled fuel is not covered under


. You will see the sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. When refueling, insert the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler . Always use a genuine SUBARU
nozzle securely into the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of fuel filler cap. If you use the
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not the vehicle. wrong cap, it may not fit or have
fully inserted, its automatic stop- . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened proper venting and your fuel tank
ping mechanism may not func- until it clicks or if the tether is caught and emission control system
tion, causing fuel to overflow the under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE may be damaged. It could also
tank and creating a fire hazard. warning light/malfunction indicator lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
. Stop refueling when the auto- lamp may illuminate. Refer to CHECK
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
matic stop mechanism on the ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
whenever the low fuel warning
fuel nozzle activates. If you con- dicator lamp F3-16.
light illuminates. Engine misfires
tinue to add fuel, temperature as a result of an empty tank
changes or other conditions CAUTION could cause damage to the en-
may cause fuel to overflow from gine.
the tank and create a fire hazard. . Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler cleaning agent may cause da-
pump automatically stops. Do not add any mage to the fuel system.
more fuel. . After refueling, turn the cap to the
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise right until it clicks to ensure that
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not to catch the tether under the cap while not securely tightened, fuel may
tightening. leak out while the vehicle is being
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, creating a fire hazard.
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged. . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
7-6 Starting and operating

State emission testing (U.S. test. CAUTION


only) The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel Resultant vehicle damage due to
At state inspection time, remember to dynamometers in their emission testing improper testing is not covered
tell your inspection or service station in programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU under the SUBARU Limited War-
advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the ranty and is the responsibility of
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- testing program that involves a two-wheel the state inspection program or its
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- dynamometer. contractors or licensees.
sion damage will result.
There are some states that use four-wheel The EPA has issued regulations for
Some states have started using dynam- dynamometers in their testing programs. inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic
ometers in their state inspection programs When properly used, that equipment will (OBD) system as part of the state emis-
in order to meet their obligation under not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle. sions inspection. The OBD system is
federal law to implement stricter vehicle designed to detect engine and transmis-
emission standards to reduce air pollution Under no circumstances should the rear sion problems that might cause vehicle
from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread- wheels be jacked off the ground, nor emissions to exceed allowable limits.
mill or roller-like testing device that allows should the driveshaft be disconnected for These inspections apply to all 1996 model
your vehicles wheels to turn while the state emission testing. year and newer passenger cars and light
vehicle remains in one place. Depending trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of
on the severity of a states air pollution WARNING Columbia have implemented the OBD
problems, the states must adopt either a system inspection.
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle
basic or enhanced vehicle emission . The inspection of the OBD system
must NEVER be performed on a
inspection test. Normally, a portion of the consists of a visual operational check of
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
basic emission test consists of an emis- the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
tempting to do so will result in
sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe function indicator lamp (MIL) and an
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle examination of the OBD system with an
may cause an accident or injuries to
for a short period of time. States with more electronic scan tool while the engine is
persons nearby.
severe air pollution problems are required running.
to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission
. A vehicle passes the OBD system
test. This test simulates actual driving
inspection if proper illumination of the
conditions on a dynamometer and permits
CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL is
more accurate measurement of tailpipe
observed, there are no stored diagnostic
emitted pollution than the basic emission
Starting and operating 7-7

trouble codes, and the OBD system Preparing to drive Starting the engine
readiness monitors are complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the You should perform the following checks
CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL is and adjustments every day before you CAUTION
not properly operating or there are one or start driving.
more diagnostic trouble codes stored in Do not operate the starter motor
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
the vehicles computer with the CHECK continuously for more than 10 sec-
lights are clean and unobstructed.
ENGINE warning light/MIL illuminated. onds. If the engine fails to start after
2. Check the appearance and condition operating the starter for 5 to 10
. A state emission inspection may reject of the tires. Also check tires for proper
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
inflation. more before trying again.
OBD system readiness monitors Not 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
Ready is greater than one. Under this leaks.
condition, the vehicle operator should be NOTE
4. Check that the hood and rear gate are
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
fully closed. It may be difficult to start the engine
days to set the monitors and return for an
5. Check the adjustment of the seat. when the battery has been discon-
emission re-inspection.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside nected and reconnected (for mainte-
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles nance or other purposes). This diffi-
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your culty is caused by the electronically
service. controlled throttles self-diagnosis
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
function. To overcome it, keep the
8. Check the operation of the warning ignition switch in the ON position
and indicator lights when the ignition for approximately 10 seconds before
switch is turned to the ON position. starting the engine.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
& MT models
NOTE 1. Apply the parking brake.
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
washer fluid and other fluid levels cessories.
should be checked daily, weekly or at 3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and
fuel stops. shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor while starting the
CONTINUED
7-8 Starting and operating

engine. the ignition switch again to the OFF If the engine does not start, try the
The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds following.
the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the or longer, turn the ignition switch to the (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
floor. START position without depressing OFF position and wait for at least
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON the accelerator pedal. 10 seconds. After checking that the
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start, parking brake is firmly set, turn the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ignition switch to the START position
Warning and indicator lights F3-12. for assistance. while depressing the accelerator pedal
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator slightly (approximately a quarter of the
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has full stroke). Release the accelerator
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto- pedal as soon as the engine starts.
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up. the ignition switch back to the OFF
following. position and wait for at least 10
& AT models seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
erator pedal and turn the ignition
OFF position and wait for at least 1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the START position. If the
10 seconds. After checking that the 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- engine starts, quickly release the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the cessories. accelerator pedal.
ignition switch to the START position
3. Shift the select lever to the P or N (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
while depressing the accelerator pedal
position (preferably P position). the ignition switch again to the OFF
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds
pedal as soon as the engine starts. the select lever is at the P or N position. or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON START position without depressing
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
position and check the operation of the the accelerator pedal.
the ignition switch back to the OFF
position and wait for at least 10 warning and indicator lights. Refer to (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- Warning and indicator lights F3-12. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
erator pedal and turn the ignition 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START for assistance.
switch to the START position. If the position without depressing the accelera- 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
engine starts, quickly release the tor pedal. Release the key immediately lights have turned off after the engine has
accelerator pedal. after the engine has started. started. The fuel injection system auto-
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn matically lowers the idle speed as the
Starting and operating 7-9

engine warms up. Stopping the engine Remote engine start system
While the engine is warming up, make (dealer option)
The ignition switch should be turned off
sure that the select lever is at the P or
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
N position and that the parking brake is
engine is idling. WARNING
applied.

CAUTION WARNING . Do not remote start a vehicle in


an enclosed environment (e.g., in
Do not stop the engine when the a closed garage). Prolonged op-
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving. This will cause eration of a motor vehicle in an
vehicle is moving, shift the select
loss of power to the power steering enclosed environment can cause
lever into the N position. Do not
and the brake booster, making steer- a harmful build-up of Carbon
attempt to place the select lever of a
ing and braking more difficult. It Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
moving vehicle into the P posi-
could also result in accidental acti- harmful to your health. Exposure
tion.
vation of the LOCK position on the to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ignition switch, causing the steering ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
wheel to lock. ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.

CONTINUED
7-10 Starting and operating

an additional four times. If the vehicle fails & Entering the vehicle while it
to start after the additional attempts, the is running via remote start
remote engine start system will abort and
return to a non-activated state. 1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless entry system. If the vehicles
& Remote start safety features doors are unlocked manually using the
key, the vehicles alarm system will trigger
For safety and security reasons, the and the remote engine start system will
system will fail to start and beep the horn turn off. Inserting the key into the ignition
twice or shut down the engine during switch and turning it to the ON position or
remote start operation if any of the pressing the unlock button on the
following conditions occur. remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-
. The brake pedal is pressed before the arm the alarm system. Refer to Alarm
vehicle ignition switch is turned on. system F2-15.
& Starting your vehicle . The key was already in the ignition 2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the
switch. brake pedal.
The remote control start system is acti- . The engine hood is opened.
vated by pressing the button twice 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch
within 3 seconds on your remote control . The vehicles engine idle speed has and turn to the ON position. If the ignition
transmitter. The system will check certain reached a level over 3,000 rpm. switch is accidentally turned to the
pre-conditions before starting, and if all . The alarm is triggered by opening a START position, the systems starter
safety parameters are correct, the engine door or the rear gate. anti-grind feature will prevent the starter
will start within 5 seconds. While the from re-cranking.
vehicle is operating via remote engine
NOTE 4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote
start, the vehicles power window features . The security indicator light on the starter disengages, the vehicles power
will be disabled. Also, the system has a dashboard will stop flashing while window features are re-enabled and the
timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if under remote engine start operation, vehicle will operate normally.
you do not operate the vehicle. Press and but the vehicle is still protected.
hold the button for 2 seconds again to . If the vehicle is entered during & Entering the vehicle follow-
turn the vehicle off. If the vehicles starter remote engine start operation, the ing remote engine start shut-
cranks but does not start or starts and system will not record entry in the down
stalls, the remote engine start system will alarm history.
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
power off then attempt to start the vehicle opened by the remote keyless entry
Starting and operating 7-11

transmitter within a few seconds immedi- start. feature programming can be adjusted
ately following remote engine start shut- ! To disengage the service mode using the following procedure.
down. 1. Open the drivers door (the drivers
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
door must remain opened throughout the
position, depress and hold the brake
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling pedal, then press and release the
entire process).
the interior of the vehicle button on the remote control transmitter 2. Insert the key into the vehicles ignition
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- three times. The system will pause for 1 switch and turn to the ON position.
perature controls to the desired setting second and flash the turn signal lights 1 3. Locate the small black programming
and operation. After the system starts the time indicating that the system has exited button behind the fuse box cover, on the
vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will service mode. drivers side left under the dashboard
activate and heat or cool the interior to panel.
your setting. NOTE 4. Press and hold the black programming
When taking your vehicle in for service, button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will
& Service mode it is recommended that you inform the honk and the turn signal lights will flash
In service mode, the remote start function service personnel that your vehicle is three times to indicate that the system has
is temporarily disabled to prevent the equipped with a remote control start entered programming mode. At this point
system from unexpectedly starting the system. you can proceed to either step 5 or step 6.
engine while being serviced. 5. To program a remote transmitter:
& Remote transmitter program- press and release the button on each
! To engage the service mode transmitter. The horn will honk and the
ming and programmable fea-
Turn the ignition switch to the ON turn signal lights will flash one time to
position, depress and hold the brake
ture option indicate a successful transmitter learn
pedal, then press and release the New transmitters can be programmed to each time the button is pressed. You
button on the remote control transmitter the engine starter system in the event that can program up to eight transmitters.
three times. The system will pause for 1 remote transmitters are lost, stolen or 6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps
second and then flash the turn signal damaged. The remote engine start system ON/OFF: press and release the brake to
lights and honk the horn three times also has one programmable feature that toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and
indicating that the system is in service can be adjusted for user preference. the turn signal lights will flash one time to
mode. When attempting to activate the The remote engine starter system can be indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are
remote start system while in service programmed to either make an audible OFF. The horn will honk and the turn
mode, the turn signal lights will flash and horn chirp upon remote start activation or signal lights will flash 2 times to indicate
the horn will honk two times and will not not. Remote transmitter programming and Confirmation Horn Chirps are ON.
CONTINUED
7-12 Starting and operating

Pressing the brake pedal repeatedly will tery.


toggle the feature ON or OFF each time. . Batteries should not be exposed
7. To exit the remote transmitter and to excessive heat such as sun-
feature programming mode, turn the igni- shine, fire or the like.
tion switch to the LOCK position, remove
the key from the ignition switch and test The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
operation of the remote transmitter(s) and CR-1220) supplied in your remote control
horn confirmation feature. should last approximately 3 years, de-
pending on usage. When the batteries
& System maintenance begin to weaken, you will notice a
decrease in range (distance from the
! Changing the remote control bat- vehicle that your remote control operates).
teries Follow the instructions below to change
the remote control batteries. 1. Carefully pry the remote control halves
CAUTION apart using a small flat-head screwdriver.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
Starting and operating 7-13

sponsible for compliance could void Manual transmission


the users authority to operate the
equipment.

NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
2. Remove the circuit board from the interference that may cause undesired
bottom half of the case and slide the white operation.
plastic battery holder out from under the The manual transmission is a fully syn-
battery tab releasing the batteries. Re- chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-
move the old batteries and replace with verse-speed transmission.
new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign The shift pattern is shown on the shift
on the old batteries before removing them lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to
to ensure that the new batteries are reverse gear, first return the shift lever to
inserted properly (battery + should be the neutral position then shift into reverse
pointed away from the transmitter circuit gear.
board on both batteries).
3. Carefully snap the case halves back To change gears, fully depress the clutch
together, then test the remote control. pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
CAUTION transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
CONTINUED
7-14 Starting and operating

WARNING & Shifting speeds Never exceed the posted speed limit.

. Do not drive the vehicle with the ! Recommended shifting speeds WARNING
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and vehicle performance during When shifting down a gear, ensure
clutch pedal is depressed) or
normal driving is ensured by shifting up that the vehicle is not travelling at a
with the shift lever in the neutral
at the speeds listed in the following table. speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
position. Engine braking has no
lowable Speed for the gear which is
effect in either of these condi-
Shift up mph (km/h) about to be selected. Failure to
tions and the risk of an accident
observe this precaution can lead to
is consequently increased. 1st to 2nd 15 (24)
engine over-revving and this in turn
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e., 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) can result in engine damage.
release the clutch pedal) sud- 3rd to 4th 40 (64) In addition, sudden application of
denly when starting the vehicle.
4th to 5th 45 (72) engine brakes when the vehicle is
By doing so the vehicle might
travelling on a slippery surface can
unexpectedly accelerate or the
! Maximum allowable speeds lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
transmission could malfunction.
quence, control of the vehicle may
The following tables show the maximum be lost and the risk of an accident
speeds that are possible with each differ- increased.
CAUTION ent gear.
Shift into reverse ONLY when the Never exceed the speed limit listed in the
vehicle has completely stopped. It following table for each gear position & Driving tips
may cause damage to the transmis- except for brief acceleration in an emer- Do not drive with your foot resting on the
sion to try shifting into reverse when gency. The tachometers needle will enter clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
the vehicle is moving. the red area if these speeds are ex- hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
ceeded. Failure to observe this precaution upgrade. Either of those actions may
can lead to excessive engine wear and cause clutch damage.
poor fuel economy. Do not drive with your hand resting on the
mph (km/h) shift lever. This may cause wear on the
1st 34 (55) transmission components.
2nd 58 (93)
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
3rd 82 (132)
Starting and operating 7-15

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, Automatic transmission R position or vice versa until
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a the vehicle has completely
lower gear before the engine starts to The automatic transmission is electroni- stopped. Such shifting may
labor. cally controlled and provides 4 forward cause damage to the transmis-
speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a sion.
On steep downgrades, downshift the
transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as manual mode and a SPORT mode. . When parking the vehicle, first
necessary; this helps to maintain a safe securely apply the parking brake
speed and to extend brake pad life.
WARNING and then place the select lever in
In this way, the engine provides a braking the P position. Avoid parking
Do not shift from the P or N
effect. Remember, if you ride (over use) for a long time with the select
position into the D or R position
the brakes while descending a hill, they lever in any other position as
while depressing the accelerator
may overheat and not work properly. doing so could result in a dead
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
battery.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock to jump forward or backward.
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This NOTE
CAUTION
phenomenon is not an indication of a . When the engine coolant tempera-
problem in your vehicle. . Shift into the P or R position ture is still low, the automatic transmis-
only after the vehicle is comple- sion will upshift to higher engine
tely stopped. Shifting while the speeds than when the coolant tempera-
vehicle is moving may cause ture is sufficiently high in order to
damage to the transmission. shorten the warm-up time and improve
driveability. The gearshift timing will
. Do not race the engine for more
automatically shift to the normal timing
than 5 seconds in any position
after the engine has warmed up.
except the N or P position
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
when the brake is set or when
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
chocks are used in the wheels.
may feel that the automatic transmis-
This may cause the automatic
sion operation is somewhat unusual.
transmission fluid to overheat.
This results from invalidation of data
. Avoid shifting from one of the which the on-board computer has
forward driving positions into the collected and stored in memory to

CONTINUED
7-16 Starting and operating

allow the transmission to shift at the using SPORT mode or manual mode. ! N (Neutral)
most appropriate times for the current This position is for restarting a stalled
! P (Park)
condition of your vehicle. Optimized engine.
shifting will be restored as the vehicle This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position the wheels and transmis-
continues to be driven for a while.
In this position, the transmission is me- sion are not locked. In this position, the
chanically locked to prevent the vehicle transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
& Select lever freely, even on the slightest incline unless
from rolling freely.
the parking brake or foot brake is applied.
When you park the vehicle, first set the Avoid coasting with the transmission in
parking brake fully, then shift into the P neutral. During coasting, there is no
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only engine braking effect.
the transmission.
WARNING
To shift the select lever from the P to any
other position, you should depress the Do not drive the vehicle with the
brake pedal fully then move the select select lever in the N (neutral)
lever. This prevents the vehicle from position. Engine braking has no
lurching when it is started. effect in this condition and the risk
! R (Reverse) of an accident is consequently in-
This position is for backing the vehicle. creased.
: Shifting is possible with the brake pedal
depressed. To shift from the N to R position, stop
: Shifting is possible whether the brake the vehicle completely then move the NOTE
pedal is depressed or not. However, lever to the R position. If the select lever is in the N position
while the ignition switch is in the LOCK when you stop the engine for parking,
or Acc position, shifting is not possible When the ignition switch has been turned
if the brake pedal is not depressed. to the LOCK position, movement of the you may not subsequently be able to
Depress the brake pedal and move the select lever from the N position to the R move it to the R or P position. If
select lever. position is possible for a limited time this happens, turn the ignition switch to
: Shifting is possible whether the brake period by depressing the brake pedal, the ON position. You will then be able
pedal is depressed or not. to move the select lever to the P
and then it becomes impossible. For
The select lever has four positions, P, details, refer to Shift lock function F7-17. position. For details, refer to Shift lock
R, N, D and also has manual gate for function F7-17.
Starting and operating 7-17
! D (Drive) accelerator pedal is pressed to accel- the P position to any other position
This position is for normal driving. erate the vehicle again. before the brake pedal is depressed.
The transmission automatically shifts into Depress the brake pedal first, and then
a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to ! While going down a hill operate the select lever.
the vehicle speed and the acceleration When you are descending a hill or any . Only the P position allows you to turn
you require. other slope while braking with the the key from the Acc position to the
SPORT mode selected, the transmission LOCK position and remove the key from
When more acceleration is required in this
may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend- the ignition key cylinder.
position, depress the accelerator pedal
ing on how hard you depress the brake . If the ignition switch is turned to the
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
pedal, causing engine braking to work. LOCK position while the select lever is in
transmission will automatically downshift
Reacceleration for a short time will cause the N position, the select lever may not
to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the transmission to upshift normally. be moved to the P position after a period
the pedal, the transmission will return to
the original gear position. of time. Therefore, move the select lever
NOTE to the P position with the brake pedal
To use the SPORT mode, move the lever . A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift depressed soon after the ignition switch is
from this position into the manual gate. To will not occur at speeds above 50 turned to the LOCK position.
use the manual mode, move the lever mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto-
from this position into the manual gate matic downshift will not occur at
then move it toward the + and ends. ! Shift lock release
speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).
. Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
! While climbing a grade the ignition switch back to the ON
may occur even when driving on a level
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to road depending on conditions, such as position then move the select lever to the
4th gear is prevented from taking place how hard you depress the brake pedal. P position with the brake pedal de-
when the accelerator is released. This pressed.
minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accel- & Shift lock function If the select lever does not move after
erating again. This prevents repeated performing the above procedure, perform
The shift lock function helps prevent the the following steps.
upshifting and downshifting resulting in a improper operation of the select lever.
smoother operation of the vehicle. . When the select lever cannot be
. The select lever cannot be operated
shifted from P to N:
NOTE unless the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position and the brake pedal is Refer to Shift lock release using the shift
The transmission may downshift to 2nd depressed. lock release button F7-18.
or 1st gear, depending on the way the
. The select lever cannot be moved from
CONTINUED
7-18 Starting and operating

. When the select lever cannot be


shifted from N to R or P:
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
tion switch in the Acc position, move the
select lever to the R or P position with
the brake pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to 2. Remove the shift lock cover using a 3. While depressing the brake pedal,
Shift lock release using the shift lock flat-head screwdriver. The shift lock re- insert a screwdriver into the hole, press
release button F7-18. lease button is located under the shift lock the shift lock release button using a
cover. screwdriver, and then move the select
! Shift lock release using the shift
lever.
lock release button NOTE
Perform the following procedure to release To prevent damage to the shift lock If the select lever does not move after
the shift lock. cover, wrap the tip of the flat-head performing the above procedure, the shift
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
engine. before removing the cover. tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
Starting and operating 7-19

& Selection of manual mode position indicator and upshift indicator


and/or downshift indicator on the combi-
nation meter illuminate. The gear position
indicator shows the currently selected
gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range. The
upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gear shift is possible. When the
upshift indicator is illuminated, up-
shifting is possible. When the downshift
indicator is illuminated, downshifting
is possible. When both indicators are
illuminated, upshifting and downshifting
are both possible. When the vehicle stops
Type A (for example, at traffic signals), the down-
shift indicator turns off.
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the D Gear shifts can be performed by using the
position to the manual gate then move it to select lever.
the + end or end of the manual gate
to select manual mode.

Type B
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly
When manual mode is selected, the gear pushing the select lever toward the +

CONTINUED
7-20 Starting and operating

end of the manual gate. off. & SPORT mode


Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly
pulling the select lever toward the & Driving tips
end of the manual gate.
. On a road surface where there is a risk
NOTE of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
Please read the following points care- gravel-covered road), you can pull away
fully and bear them in mind when using from a standstill (safely and easily) by first
the manual mode. selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when . Always apply the foot or parking brake
a downshift would push the tachometer when the vehicle is stopped in the D or
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will R position.
be emitted to warn you that the down- . Always set the parking brake when
shift is not possible. parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
SPORT mode is used when power is
. If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle with only the transmission.
needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary driving. To select this mode, move the
sion will not respond. position on an uphill grade by using the select lever from the D position to the
. You can perform a skip-shift (for D position. Use the brake instead. manual gate.
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating . The engine may, on rare occasions,
the select lever twice in rapid succes- knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
sion. ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
. The transmission automatically se- This phenomenon does not indicate a
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops problem.
moving.
. If the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid becomes too high,
the AT OIL TEMP warning light will
illuminate and upshifts to 4th gear will
not be possible. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and let the
engine idle until the warning light turns
Starting and operating 7-21

select lever to the D position or select Power steering


manual mode.
To subsequently reselect SPORT mode, The power steering system operates only
move the select lever to the D position when the engine is running.
and from there to the manual gate. If you lose power steering assist because
In this mode, the transmission shifts up at the engine stops or the system fails to
higher vehicle speeds and shifts down function, you can steer but it will take
more responsively than in normal mode. much more effort.

CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
Type A more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.

NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adja-
cent to the power steering pump which
is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This noise is
normal. It does not indicate power
steering system trouble.

Type B
When selected, the SPORT mode indica-
tor light on the combination meter will turn
on.
To deselect SPORT mode, move the
7-22 Starting and operating

Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep ! Brake assist system


driving straight ahead while gradually
& Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the WARNING
road to a safe place.
WARNING Do not be overconfident about the
& Brake system brake assist. It is not a system that
Never rest your foot on the brake brings more braking ability to the
pedal while driving. This can cause ! Two separate circuits vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
dangerous overheating of the Your vehicle has two separate circuit ity. Always use the utmost care
brakes and needless wear on the brake systems. Each circuit works diag- when driving regarding vehicle
brake pads and linings. onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of speed and safe distance.
the brake system should fail, the other half
! When the brakes get wet of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer CAUTION
When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much When you need to brake suddenly,
result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the continue depressing the brake pedal
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle. strongly to bring the effect of the
at a safe speed while lightly depressing brake assist.
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
! Use of engine braking
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not It assists the brake power when the driver
Remember to make use of engine braking turn off the engine while driving because cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
in addition to foot braking. When descend- that will turn off the brake booster, result- and the brake power is insufficient.
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, ing in poor braking power. Brake assist generates the brake power
the brakes may start working improperly The brakes will continue to work even according to the speed at which the driver
because of brake fluid overheating, when the brake booster completely stops depresses the brake pedal.
caused by overheated brake pads. To functioning. If this happens, however, you
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to will have to push the pedal much harder NOTE
get stronger engine braking. than normal and the braking distance will When you depress the brake pedal
! Braking when a tire is punctured increase. strongly or suddenly, the following
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly phenomena occur. However, even
when a tire is punctured. This could cause though these occur, they do not indi-
Starting and operating 7-23

cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- vehicles.
assist system is operating properly.
tem) . When driving on badly surfaced
. You might feel that the brake pedal roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
is applied by lighter force and gener- The ABS system prevents the lock-up of over deep newly fallen snow,
ates a greater braking force. wheels which may occur during sudden stopping distances may be long-
. You might hear clicking (knocking) braking or braking on slippery road sur- er for a vehicle with the ABS
sounds around brake pedal. faces. This helps prevent the loss of system than one without. When
steering control and directional stability driving under these conditions,
& Disc brake pad wear warning caused by wheel lock-up. therefore, reduce your speed and
indicators leave ample distance from other
When the ABS system is operating, you vehicles.
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal . When you feel the ABS system
when the ABS operates. operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure.
The ABS system will not operate when the Do not pump the brake pedal
vehicle speed is below approximately 6 since doing so may defeat the
mph (10 km/h). operation of the ABS system.
WARNING
& ABS system self-check
Always use the utmost care in
driving overconfidence because Just after the vehicle is started, you may
you are driving a vehicle with the feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
ABS system could easily lead to a to when the ABS operates, and you may
The disc brake pad wear warning indica- serious accident. also hear the sound of the ABS working
tors on the disc brakes give a warning from the engine compartment. This is
noise when the brake pads are worn. caused by an automatic functional test of
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard CAUTION the ABS system being carried out and
from the disc brakes while braking, im- does not indicate any abnormal condition.
mediately have your vehicle checked by . The ABS system does not always
your SUBARU dealer. decrease stopping distance. You & ABS warning light
should always maintain a safe Refer to ABS warning light F3-19.
following distance from other
7-24 Starting and operating

Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system system warning light and ABS warning
malfunctions light illuminate simultaneously.
tribution (EBD) system
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
The EBD system maximizes the effective- the brake system warning light and ABS
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear warning light illuminate simultaneously
brakes to supply a greater proportion of during driving.
the braking force. It functions by adjusting Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
the distribution of braking force to the rear conventional braking system will still func-
wheels in accordance with the vehicles tion. However, the rear wheels will be
loading condition and speed. more prone to locking when the brakes
The EBD system is an integral part of the are applied harder than usual and the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS vehicles motion may therefore become
systems components to perform its func- somewhat harder to control.
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak- If the brake system warning light and ABS
ing force. If any of the ABS components warning light illuminate simultaneously,
Type A
used by the EBD system malfunction, the take the following steps.
EBD system also stops working. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight 2. Shut down the engine, apply the
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal parking brake, and then restart it.
and does not indicate a malfunction. 3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
Type B again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to Brake fluid
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
F11-25.
the system stops working and the brake
Starting and operating 7-25

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the Vehicle Dynamics Control that full vehicle control will be
MIN mark, the EBD system may be maintained at all times and under
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
system
all conditions, its activation
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the should be seen as a sign that
system inspected. WARNING the speed of the vehicle should
6. If the brake fluid level is below the be reduced considerably.
MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Always use the utmost care in . Whenever suspension compo-
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the driving overconfidence because nents, steering components, or
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. you are driving a vehicle with the an axle are removed from a
Vehicle Dynamics Control system vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
could easily lead to a serious acci- Dynamics Control system, have
WARNING dent. an inspection of that system
. Driving with the brake system performed by an authorized
warning light illuminated is dan- SUBARU dealer.
gerous. This indicates your brake
CAUTION
. The following precautions should
system may not be working . Even if your vehicle is equipped be observed in order to ensure
properly. If the light remains on, with Vehicle Dynamics Control that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
have the brakes inspected by a system, winter tires should be trol system is operating properly:
SUBARU dealer immediately. used when driving on snow-cov- All four wheels should be
. If at all in doubt about whether ered or icy roads; in addition, fitted with tires of the same
the brakes are operating prop- vehicle speed should be reduced size, type, and brand. Further-
erly, do not drive the vehicle. considerably. Simply having a more, the amount of wear
Have your vehicle towed to the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- should be the same for all
nearest SUBARU dealer for re- tem does not guarantee that the four tires.
pair. vehicle will be able to avoid
Keep the tire pressure at the
accidents in any situation.
proper level as shown on the
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- vehicle placard attached to
namics Control system is an the drivers side door pillar.
indication that the road being
Use only the specified tem-
travelled on has a slippery sur-
porary spare tire to replace a
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
flat tire. With a temporary
namics Control is no guarantee
CONTINUED
7-26 Starting and operating

spare tire, the effectiveness of NOTE when the vehicle is fitted with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control . Slight twitching of the brake pedal snow tires or winter tires
system is reduced and this may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
should be taken into account Control system operates; a small de- Control system will cause operation of
when driving the vehicle in gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak- the steering wheel to feel slightly
such a condition. ing may also be noticed in this situa- different compared to that for normal
tion. These are normal characteristics conditions.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation . Even if the vehicle is equipped with
on a slippery road surface and/or during and are no cause for alarm. a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, . When driving off immediately after is important that winter tires be used
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system starting the engine, a short-lived opera- when driving on snow-covered or icy
adjusts the engines output and the tion noise may be noticed coming from roads. (All four wheels should be fitted
wheels respective braking forces to help the engine compartment. This noise is with tires of the same size and brand.)
maintain traction and directional control. generated as a result of a check being . It is always important to reduce
. Traction Control Function performed on the Vehicle Dynamics speed when approaching a corner,
The traction control function is designed to Control system and is normal. even if the vehicle is equipped with
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on . Depending on the timing of activa- Vehicle Dynamics Control.
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may . All four wheels should be fitted with
maintain traction and directional control. seem to jolt when you drive off after tires of the same size, type, and brand;
Activation of this function is shown by starting the engine. This is a conse- furthermore, the amount of wear
steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy- quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- should be the same for all four tires. If
namics Control operation indicator light. trol operational check and is normal. these precautions are not observed
. In the circumstances listed in the and non-matching tires are used, it is
. Skid Suppression Function following, the vehicle may be more quite possible that the Vehicle Dy-
The skid suppression function is designed unstable than it feels to the driver. namics Control system will be unable
to help maintain directional stability by The Vehicle Dynamics Control System to operate correctly as intended.
suppressing the wheels tendency to slide may therefore operate. Such operation
. Always turn off the engine before
sideways during steering operations. Acti- does not indicate a system malfunc-
replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
vation of this function is shown by flashing tion.
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation on gravel-covered or rutted system unable to operate correctly.
indicator light. roads
on unfinished roads
Starting and operating 7-27

& Vehicle Dynamics Control When the switch is pressed during engine switch. To make the switch usable
system monitor operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control again, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF indicator light on the combination LOCK position and restart the en-
Refer to Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics gine.
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- Control system will be deactivated and the . When the switch is pressed to
tion indicator light F3-22 and Vehicle vehicle will behave like a model not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light F3- equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system, the vehicles running per-
23. trol system. When the switch is pressed formance is comparable with that of a
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
& Vehicle Dynamics Control Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
OFF switch Control OFF indicator light turns off. activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system system except when absolutely neces-
deactivated, traction and stability en- sary.
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore Control system is deactivated, compo-
you should not deactivate the Vehicle nents of the brake control system may
Dynamics Control system except under still activate. When the brake control
above-mentioned situations. system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
NOTE light illuminates.
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
Pressing the switch to deactivate the vates itself the next time the ignition
Vehicle Dynamics Control system can switch is turned to the LOCK position
facilitate the following operations: and the engine is restarted.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping . If the switch is held down for 10
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or seconds or longer, the indicator light
otherwise slippery surface turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
. extrication of the vehicle when its system is activated, and the system
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow ignores any further pressing of the
7-28 Starting and operating

Tire pressure monitoring The tire pressure monitoring system pro- accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
vides the driver with a warning message cool thoroughly before adjusting
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. by sending a signal from a sensor that is their pressures to the standard
models) installed in each wheel when tire pressure values shown on the tire placard.
is severely low. Refer to Tires and wheels F11-30.
The tire pressure monitoring system will The tire pressure monitoring system
activate only when the vehicle is driven at does not function when the vehicle
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, is stationary. After adjusting the tire
this system may not react immediately to a pressures, increase the vehicle
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
a blow-out caused by running over a to start the TPMS re-checking of the
sharp object). tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
WARNING low pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
If the low tire pressure warning light off a few minutes later.
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving If this light still illuminates while
Type A straight ahead while gradually redu- driving after adjusting the tire pres-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the sure, a tire may have significant
road to a safe place. Otherwise an damage and a fast leak that causes
accident involving serious vehicle the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
damage and serious personal injury a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
could occur. as soon as possible.
Check the pressure for all four tires When a spare tire is mounted or a
and adjust the pressure to the COLD wheel rim is replaced without the
tire pressure shown on the tire original pressure sensor/transmitter
placard on the door pillar on the being transferred, the low tire pres-
drivers side. sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mately 1 minute. This indicates the
very short distance, the tires get TPMS is unable to monitor all four
Type B warm and their pressures increase road wheels. Contact your SUBARU
Starting and operating 7-29

dealer as soon as possible for tire NOTE Parking your vehicle


and sensor replacement and/or sys- This device complies with Part 15 of
tem resetting. the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC & Parking brake
Do not inject any tire liquid or Rules. Operation is subject to the To set the parking brake, depress the
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, following two conditions: (1) this de- brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
as this may cause a malfunction of vice may not cause harmful interfer- the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
the tire pressure sensors. If the light ence, and (2) this device must accept
illuminates steadily after blinking for any interference received, including
approximately 1 minute, promptly interference that may cause undesired
contact a SUBARU dealer to have operation.
the system inspected.

CAUTION
. Do not place metal film or any
metal parts in the cargo room/
trunk. This may cause poor re-
ception of the signals from the
tire pressure sensors, and the
tire pressure monitoring system To release the parking brake, pull the lever
will not function properly. up slightly, press the release button, then
lower the lever while keeping the button
. FCC WARNING pressed.
Changes or modifications not When the parking brake is set while the
expressly approved by the party engine is running, the parking brake
responsible for compliance warning light illuminates. After starting
could void the users authority the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
to operate the equipment. has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to Brake system warning light F3-
20.

CONTINUED
7-30 Starting and operating

CAUTION WARNING
Never drive while the parking brake . Never leave unattended children
is set because this will cause un- or pets in the vehicle. They could
necessary wear on the brake lin- accidentally injure themselves or
ings. Before starting to drive, always others through inadvertent op-
make sure that the parking brake eration of the vehicle. Also, on
has been fully released. hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
& Parking tips cause severe or possibly fatal
When parking your vehicle, always per- injuries to people.
form the following procedure. . Do not park the vehicle over
When the vehicle is facing uphill, the front flammable materials such as dry
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
wheels should be turned away from the grass, waste paper or rags, as
. For MT models, put the shift lever in curb.
the 1 (1st) position when on an upgrade they may burn easily if they come
or the R (Reverse) position when on a near hot engine or exhaust sys-
downgrade. tem parts.
. For AT models, put the select lever in . Be sure to stop the engine if you
the P (Park) position. take a nap in the vehicle. If
. When parking on a hill, always turn the engine exhaust gas enters the
steering wheel as follows. passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION
When the vehicle is facing downhill, the . Always set the parking brake
front wheels should be turned into the firmly when parking your vehicle.
curb. Never rely on the transmission
Starting and operating 7-31

alone to hold the vehicle. Hill start assist system (MT


. If your vehicle has a front under- models)
spoiler and rear underspoiler (if
equipped), pay attention to
blocks and other obstructions CAUTION
on the ground when parking.
The underspoilers could be da- The Hill start assist system is a
maged by contact with them. device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake,
make sure that the vehicle remains On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal
stationary when the clutch pedal is is depressed while the brake pedal is also
released. depressed, braking power is maintained
temporarily by the Hill start assist system
The Hill start assist system is a device to when the brake pedal is released. The
make starting on an uphill grade easier. driver is therefore able to start the vehicle
the same way as on a level grade, just
using the clutch and accelerator pedal.

CONTINUED
7-32 Starting and operating

& Hill start assist warning light Cruise control


Refer to Hill start assist warning light (MT
models) F3-21. Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the
main switch is turned OFF when the
cruise control is not in use to avoid
unintentionally setting the cruise control.
NOTE
If you press the main switch button
The Hill start assist system does not while turning the ignition switch ON,
operate when the vehicle is facing down- the cruise control function is deacti-
hill. And the Hill start assist system may vated and the cruise control indicator
not operate on slight grades. light flashes. To reactivate the cruise
control function, turn the ignition
When starting in reverse and using the Hill switch back to the Acc or LOCK
start assist system, a braking effect may position, and then turn it again to the
be felt even after the brake pedal has ON position.
been released. However, this braking
effect should disappear once the clutch
pedal is released. WARNING
A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle Do not use the cruise control under
begins to move forward after being re- any of the following conditions. This
versed. may cause loss of vehicle control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal . driving on slippery or winding
is released, apply more braking power by roads
pressing the brake pedal again. . driving in heavy traffic
Starting and operating 7-33

. towing a trailer

& To set cruise control

Type A 3. Push the SET/COAST button and


release it. Then release the accelerator
pedal.

1. Push the CRUISE main switch but-


ton.

Type B
The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate. Type A
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
CONTINUED
7-34 Starting and operating

Type B . Push the CANCEL button. To resume the cruise control after it has
At this time, the cruise control set indicator . Depress the brake pedal. been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
light on the combination meter will illumi- . Depress the clutch pedal (MT models cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
nate. only). km/h) or more, push the RES/ACC
The vehicle will maintain the desired . Shift the select lever into the N button to return to the original cruising
speed. position (AT models only). speed automatically.
. Shift the shift lever into neutral position The cruise control set indicator light on the
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- combination meter will automatically illu-
creased while driving with the cruise (MT models only).
minate at this time.
control activated. Simply depress the The cruise control set indicator light on the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
& To turn off the cruise control
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and There are two ways to turn off the cruise
maintain the previous cruising speed. control:
. Push the CRUISE main switch button
& To temporarily cancel the again.
cruise control . Turn the ignition switch to the Acc or
The cruise control can be temporarily LOCK position (but only when the
canceled in the following ways. vehicle is completely stopped).
Starting and operating 7-35

& To change the cruising speed speed. ! To decrease the speed (by button)
2. Push the SET/COAST button once.
! To increase the speed (by button) Now the desired speed is set and the
vehicle will keep running at that speed
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the button is
pushed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
cruise control system unit regards this
operation as that intended to decrease Push the SET/COAST button and hold it
the vehicle speed. until the vehicle reaches the desired
Push the RES/ACC button and hold it speed. Then, release the button. The
until the vehicle reaches the desired vehicle speed at that moment will be
speed. Then, release the button. The memorized and treated as the new set
vehicle speed at that moment will be speed.
memorized and treated as the new set
speed. When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
When the difference between the actual than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
vehicle speed and the set speed is less be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can pressing the SET/COAST button quickly.
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the RES/ACC button quickly. ! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
! To increase the speed (by accel-
erator pedal) 1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
2. When the speed decreases to the
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
desired speed, press the SET/COAST
CONTINUED
7-36 Starting and operating

button once. Now the desired speed is set


and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed without depressing the accelerator
pedal.

& Cruise control indicator light


Refer to Cruise control indicator light
F3-25.

& Cruise control set indicator


light
Refer to Cruise control set indicator light
F3-25.
Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving the first Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Roof rail (if equipped) ........................................ 8-14
Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped) ............ 8-14
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-16
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-16
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5 When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-17
On-pavement and off-road driving ..................... 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-18
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-18
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-18
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-21
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11 8
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11
8-2 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
tion. Always accelerate gently until you Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first
reach the desired speed. Then try to carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
maintain that speed for as long as and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid . Always properly maintain the en-
racing the engine. gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Never run the engine in a closed
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except
is located under the door latch on the for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
drivers side. Low pressure will increase the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency.
tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary. the engine is running. If that is
mounted engine or when brake pads or . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti-
brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Driving tips 8-3

exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
vehicle, have the problem gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
checked and corrected as soon
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
as possible. If you must drive
ter:
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
. Keep the rear gate closed while catalytic converter.
driving to prevent exhaust gas
. Never start the engine by pushing or
from entering the vehicle.
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
NOTE . Never turn off the ignition switch while
Due to the expansion and contraction the vehicle is moving.
of the metals used in the manufacture . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
of the exhaust system, you may hear a the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
crackling sound coming from the ex- Turbo models firing or incomplete combustion), have
haust system for a short time after the your vehicle checked and repaired by an
engine has been shut off. This sound is authorized SUBARU dealer.
normal. . Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.

WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
Non-turbo models near flammable materials (e.g.,
The catalytic converter is installed in the grass, paper, rags or leaves),
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to because the catalytic converter

CONTINUED
8-4 Driving tips

operates at very high tempera- Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries


tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
materials away from the exhaust at all times, always have the recom- another country:
pipe while the engine is running. mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
The exhaust gas is very hot. the maintenance schedule in the War- fuel. Refer to Fuel requirements F7-2.
ranty and Maintenance Booklet per- . Comply with all regulations and re-
formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country.
intervals.
Driving tips 8-5

Driving tips for AWD models . An AWD model is better able to climb . There are some precautions that you
steeper roads under snowy or slippery must observe when towing your vehicle.
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. For detail information, refer to Towing
There is little difference in handling, F9-14.
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving WARNING
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an . Always maintain a safe driving
ample distance from other vehicles. speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
avoid having an accident on a
use only the same size, construction,
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
brand, and load range as the original tires
ing or under other similar condi-
listed on the tire placard. Using other
tions.
sizes, circumference or construction may
result in severe mechanical damage to the . Always use the utmost care in
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine drive train of your vehicle and may affect driving overconfidence be-
power to all four wheels. AWD models ride, handling, braking, speedometer/od- cause you are driving an All-
provide better traction when driving on ometer calibration, and clearance be- Wheel Drive model could easily
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tween the body and tires. It also may be lead to a serious accident.
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle
By shifting power between the front and control.
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . If you use a temporary spare tire to
provide added traction during acceleration replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
and added engine braking force during original temporary spare tire stored in the
deceleration. vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle train of your vehicle.
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains . Always check the cold tire pressure
some features unique to AWD. For safety before starting to drive. The recom-
purposes as well as to avoid damaging mended tire pressure is provided on the
the AWD system, you should keep the tire placard, which is located under the
following tips in mind: door latch on the drivers side.
8-6 Driving tips

On-pavement and off-road with its higher profile and center SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
of gravity, is more likely to be precautions such as those in the following
driving list should be taken.
affected by crosswinds than or-
dinary passenger cars. . Make certain that you and all of your
WARNING . Always use the utmost care in passengers are wearing seatbelts.
driving overconfidence be- . Carry some emergency equipment,
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted cause you are driving an All- such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
person is significantly more Wheel Drive model could easily wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
likely to die than a person wear- lead to a serious accident. citizens band radio.
ing a seat belt. You the driver and . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
all your passengers should fas- Your vehicle is classified as a utility sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
ten the seatbelts before starting vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher over rough terrain.
to drive in order to minimize the ground clearance which enables them to . Slow down and employ extra caution at
chance of serious injury or death. be used for wide applications including off- all times. When driving off-road, you will
. Do not make sharp turns and road driving. But please keep in mind that not have the benefit of marked traffic
quick maneuvers unless abso- your vehicle is neither a conventional off- lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
lutely unavoidable. Such actions road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A the like.
are dangerous as you may lose higher center of gravity in relation to the . Do not drive across steep slopes.
control, possibly resulting in a tread width as compared with ordinary Instead, drive either straight up or straight
rollover which could cause death passenger cars makes vehicles of this down the slopes. A vehicle can much
or serious injury. type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility more easily tip over sideways than it can
. Always maintain a safe driving vehicles have a significantly higher roll- end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
speed according to the road and over rate than other types of vehicles. The down slopes that are too steep.
weather conditions in order to high ground clearance of this vehicle is a
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
avoid having an accident on a real advantage, giving you a better view of
cially at higher speeds.
sharp turn, during sudden brak- the road and allowing you to anticipate
problems earlier. However, remember that . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
ing or under other similar condi- steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
tions. your utility vehicle is not designed for high-
speed cornering comparable to ordinary wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
. Whenever strong crosswinds are passenger cars and that your vehicle with your fingers and thumbs on the
present, slow down sufficiently could roll over if you make a sharp turn outside of the rim.
to maintain control of your vehi- at high speed. If you do take your . If driving through water, such as when
cle. Remember that your vehicle,
Driving tips 8-7

crossing shallow streams, first check the underbody. Clear off any such matter from need to be washed thoroughly.
depth of the water and the bottom of the the underbody. If the vehicle is used with . Frequent driving of an AWD model
stream bed for firmness and ensure that these materials trapped or adhering to the under hard-driving conditions such as
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly underbody, a mechanical breakdown or rough roads or off roads will necessitate
and completely through the stream. The fire could occur. more frequent replacement of engine oil,
water should be shallow enough that it . Secure all cargo carried inside the brake fluid and transmission oil than that
does not reach the vehicles undercar- vehicle and make certain that it is not specified in the maintenance schedule
riage. Water entering the engine air intake piled higher than the seatbacks. During described in the Warranty and Mainte-
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo nance Booklet.
onto electrical parts may damage your could be thrown around